WO2024066978A1 - Loudspeaker and electronic device - Google Patents

Loudspeaker and electronic device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024066978A1
WO2024066978A1 PCT/CN2023/117206 CN2023117206W WO2024066978A1 WO 2024066978 A1 WO2024066978 A1 WO 2024066978A1 CN 2023117206 W CN2023117206 W CN 2023117206W WO 2024066978 A1 WO2024066978 A1 WO 2024066978A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
beam generating
generating unit
diaphragm
sub
valve
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/117206
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
胡成博
陈家熠
丁玉江
陶婧雅
王晨
黎椿键
朱统
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024066978A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024066978A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/02Details
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04RLOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; DEAF-AID SETS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R9/00Transducers of moving-coil, moving-strip, or moving-wire type
    • H04R9/06Loudspeakers

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of terminal electronic devices, and in particular, to a speaker and an electronic device.
  • a speaker is an electronic device that outputs audible sound.
  • the sound pressure of a traditional speaker diaphragm is positively correlated with the surface area and displacement of the diaphragm. Limited by the physical size of the speaker, the surface area and displacement of the diaphragm set in the speaker are limited. For audible sounds with lower frequencies, the sound pressure generated by the diaphragm is small and not easily perceived by the human ear, which leads to poor performance in the low-frequency range of the speaker.
  • audible sound with a sound pressure within the human hearing threshold can be generated by first generating high-frequency beams and then appropriately modulating these high-frequency beams.
  • This method can improve the low-frequency performance of small-sized speakers on electronic devices to a certain extent, but since it is necessary to generate high-frequency beams, this method also increases the energy consumption of the terminal device or mobile device. It is worth considering how to improve the energy utilization efficiency of the speaker so that the high-frequency beams can be better converted into audible sound after modulation.
  • the present application provides a speaker and an electronic device, wherein a guiding structure is arranged in the speaker.
  • a first beam generated in the speaker has a higher sound pressure than a second beam output after valve modulation, which is beneficial to improving the energy conversion rate of the speaker and the speaker's ability to express low-frequency audible sounds.
  • a speaker comprising: a housing; a valve, the valve and the housing enclose a cavity, the valve having a passage; a beam generating module, the beam generating module being located in the cavity, the beam generating module being used to generate a first beam; a guiding structure, the guiding structure being located between the valve and the beam generating module;
  • the valve is configured to open a channel or close a channel to modulate a first beam, and at least a portion of the first beam propagates through the channel to the outside of the cavity to form a second beam.
  • the propagation path of the first beam is coupled with the shape and/or physical size of the cavity, so that the sound pressure of the second beam is increased.
  • the valve can be a symmetrical valve or an asymmetrical valve.
  • the first beam generated by the beam generating module will produce reflection, scattering, etc. during the process of propagating in the cavity.
  • the propagation path of the first beam and the physical size of the cavity can be matched with each other, so that the sound pressure of the second beam obtained after the first beam propagated to the channel is increased after valve modulation. That is, the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker is improved in the process of converting the energy of the internally generated beam into the energy of audible sound, and the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker is improved, which is beneficial to improving the speaker's ability to perform low-frequency audible sounds.
  • a guiding structure is arranged inside the cavity of the speaker.
  • the guiding structure can make the first beam generated by the beam generating module converge toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker without changing the valve and beam generating module of the speaker. This not only improves the space utilization efficiency in the speaker cavity, but also avoids changes to the valve and beam generating module of the existing speaker, which is conducive to improving the applicability of the present technical solution to different scenarios.
  • the beam generating module includes a diaphragm
  • the guiding structure includes a first guiding structure
  • the first guiding structure includes an additional radiating surface
  • the additional radiating surface is connected to the diaphragm
  • the beam generating module may include a plurality of beam generating units, the plurality of beam generating units are respectively connected to a plurality of additional radiating surfaces, and the plurality of additional radiating surfaces face the channel.
  • the surface undergoes the same or similar vibration.
  • the propagation path of the first beam generated by the beam generating module is adjusted by setting an additional radiation surface.
  • the solution can be implemented based on the existing beam generating module and valve of the speaker without replacing or redesigning the existing components.
  • the shape, size and other properties of the additional radiation surface can be set according to the properties of the beam generating module, thereby improving the applicability of the solution.
  • the additional radiation surface includes at least one first curved surface, and an opening of the at least one first curved surface faces the channel.
  • the additional radiating surface is designed to be a shape that can achieve beam focusing.
  • the beams generated at various positions within the concave surface of the additional radiating surface are focused in a specific direction by changing the physical shape of the additional radiating surface.
  • the opening direction of the additional radiating surface is toward the channel, it is beneficial to increase the sound pressure near the channel.
  • the implementation of the present technical solution is conducive to achieving the convergence of the first beam toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of increasing the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker.
  • the beam generating module includes multiple beam generating units
  • multiple additional radiating surfaces can be set for the multiple beam generating units respectively, and the properties of the multiple additional radiating surfaces can be set according to the properties of each beam generating unit connected thereto, so that the beams generated by the multiple beam generating units can be guided separately, which is beneficial to further increase the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker.
  • the guide structure includes a second guide structure, the second guide structure includes a guide surface, the guide surface is located between the channel and the side wall of the shell; from one side of the guide surface close to the side wall to the other side of the guide surface close to the channel, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually increases.
  • the guide surface may be a curved surface or a flat surface.
  • the guide surface is disposed between the inner wall of the speaker housing and the channel, and the first beam incident on the guide surface may be guided to a side close to the channel.
  • a guiding surface is set between the valve and the beam generating module, and the guiding surface is used to adjust the propagation path of the first beam to the channel, so that the first beam is gathered near the channel, thereby increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker.
  • the second guide structure further includes at least one connecting surface, the at least one connecting surface is connected to the guide surface, and the at least one connecting surface is connected to the valve and/or the housing.
  • the at least one connecting surface is connected to a side wall and/or a bottom of the housing.
  • the second guide structure is provided with at least one connection surface, which is connected to the valve and/or the shell through the connection surface, thereby achieving fixation of the guide surface, which is beneficial to improving the stability of the physical structure of the speaker and the reliability of the performance.
  • the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, or the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing.
  • the second guide structure When the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, the second guide structure can be in the form of a thin sheet, and a side of the second guide structure close to the cavity can be a guide surface.
  • the second guide structure When the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing, the second guide structure can be in the form of a block, and a side of the second guide structure close to the beam generating module can be a guide surface.
  • the second guide structure and the valve are set as an integrally formed structure, or the second guide structure and the housing are set as an integrally formed structure, and the integrally formed structure is more stable and reliable.
  • the integrally formed structure of multiple components can simplify the assembly process of the speaker, which is conducive to improving the integrity of the speaker structure and realizing the customization of the speaker performance.
  • the number of the guide surfaces is multiple, the shell includes multiple side walls, and the multiple guide surfaces are respectively arranged corresponding to the multiple side walls.
  • the housing of the loudspeaker is a rectangular parallelepiped structure
  • the number of the guide surfaces may be at least two
  • the at least two guide surfaces may be respectively connected to any two side walls of the four side walls of the housing.
  • the housing of the speaker is cylindrical, and the guide surface may be an annular structure, the outer wall of the annular structure is connected to the inner wall of the housing.
  • multiple guiding surfaces are provided and arranged around the channel.
  • the multiple first beams generated by the beam generating module at different positions of the cavity can be more concentrated near the channel, which is beneficial to increase the sound pressure near the channel and improve the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker.
  • the guiding structure also includes a third guiding structure, the third guiding structure is a metamaterial structure, the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
  • the third guiding structure is a metamaterial structure
  • the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
  • Metamaterial structures can contain different structural units.
  • the same structural units can be arranged in different distribution modes.
  • the units may have different shapes, sizes and distribution patterns.
  • a metamaterial structure is arranged in the cavity to adjust the propagation paths of multiple beams in the first beam, which is beneficial to improving the utilization rate of the speaker cavity space, improving the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker, and improving the speaker's ability to express low-frequency audible sound.
  • the beam generating module includes a diaphragm facing the channel.
  • the diaphragm facing the channel can be understood as the normal of the diaphragm facing the channel; when the diaphragm is a curved surface, the diaphragm facing the channel can be understood as the direction of beam propagation facing the channel after the beams generated by different areas on the curved surface converge.
  • the first beam generated by the beam generating module is converged toward the channel by adjusting the beam generating module.
  • the direction of the radiation surface of the beam generating module is adjusted so that the beam propagated by the radiation surface can propagate toward the channel, and more first beams can converge near the channel, which is beneficial to improving the sound pressure of the beam output by the speaker and the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker.
  • the diaphragm includes at least one second curved surface, and an opening of the at least one second curved surface faces the channel.
  • the beam generating module includes a first beam generating unit and a second beam generating unit, the first beam generating unit includes a first diaphragm, and the second beam generating unit includes a second diaphragm; the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam, the first diaphragm is used to generate the first sub-beam, the second diaphragm is used to generate the second sub-beam, and the area of the first diaphragm is different from the area of the second diaphragm.
  • the beams generated by beam generating units with different radiation surface areas have different energies.
  • the beam generating module can be provided with multiple beam generating units, and the radiation surface areas of the multiple beam generating units can be different.
  • Beam generating units with different distances from the channel can be provided with radiation surfaces of different areas to generate multiple beams with different energies. The convergence of multiple beams with different energies near the channel is conducive to further improving the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker and the transmittance of sound pressure.
  • the beam generating module includes a third beam generating unit, a fourth beam generating unit and a fifth beam generating unit
  • the first beam includes a third sub-beam, a fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam
  • the third beam generating unit is used to generate the third sub-beam
  • the fourth beam generating unit is used to generate the fourth sub-beam
  • the fifth beam generating unit is used to generate the fifth sub-beam
  • the third beam generating unit, the fourth beam generating unit and the fifth beam generating unit are in the same plane
  • the fifth beam generating unit is located between the third beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit
  • the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the third beam generating unit is different from the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit.
  • the distance between two adjacent beam generating units can be understood as the distance between two diaphragms included in two adjacent beam generating units, and the distance between brackets for fixing the diaphragms of two adjacent beam generating units.
  • the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating unit is adjusted by adjusting the spacing between adjacent beam generating units.
  • the present technical solution can achieve the purpose of increasing the output sound pressure without increasing the number of beam generating units, which is conducive to simplifying the internal structure of the speaker and facilitating the repair and maintenance of the speaker or an electronic device including the speaker.
  • the beam generating module includes a sixth beam generating unit and a seventh beam generating unit, the sixth beam generating unit includes a third diaphragm, and the seventh beam generating unit includes a fourth diaphragm; the orthographic projection of the third diaphragm in the projection plane and the orthographic projection of the fourth diaphragm in the projection plane at least partially overlap, and the projection plane is parallel to the height direction of the speaker, or the projection plane is perpendicular to the height direction of the speaker.
  • the orthographic projections of the first diaphragm and the second diaphragm in the projection plane are at least partially overlapped, so that the space in the speaker cavity can be further utilized, and a beam generating module with a larger radiation area can be arranged in the speaker cavity, which is beneficial to improve the utilization rate of the speaker cavity space and further improve the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker.
  • the beam generating module includes an eighth beam generating unit and a ninth beam generating unit
  • the first beam includes a sixth sub-beam and a seventh sub-beam
  • the eighth beam generating unit is used to generate the sixth sub-beam
  • the ninth beam generating unit is used to generate the seventh sub-beam
  • the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam is different from the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  • the valve is an asymmetric valve, and a distance from the eighth beam generating unit to the channel is different from a distance from the ninth beam generating unit to the channel.
  • different transmission delays may be set for different beam generating units to change the transmission delays of different beam generating units.
  • the generating unit generates the phase difference of the beam arriving at the channel.
  • the speaker further includes a control circuit, and the control circuit is used to determine a transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam and a transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  • the phases of the multiple beams arriving near the channel can be adjusted by controlling the transmission delays of the multiple beams included in the first beam, which is conducive to achieving phase superposition of multiple beams and avoiding phase cancellation of multiple beams, which is conducive to further improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker.
  • the beam generating module includes a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units constitute a beam generating unit array.
  • multiple beam generating units can be arranged in the speaker, and the multiple beam generating units can form an array.
  • the multiple beam generating units arranged in the array can send the first beam in various directions in the cavity, and the propagation paths of different first beams are different.
  • the implementation of this technical solution is conducive to improving the probability of beam convergence and phase superposition generated by multiple beam generating units, and is conducive to improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker.
  • the first beam is an ultrasonic wave
  • the second beam is an audible sound
  • a speaker comprising: a shell; a valve, the valve and the shell forming a cavity, the valve having a channel; a beam generating module, the beam generating module being located in the cavity, the beam generating module being used to generate a first beam; wherein the valve is configured to open the channel or close the channel to modulate the first beam, and at least part of the first beam propagates through the channel to the outside of the cavity to form a second beam.
  • the beam generating module includes a diaphragm facing the channel.
  • the diaphragm includes at least one second curved surface, and an opening of the at least one second curved surface faces the channel.
  • the beam generating module includes a first beam generating unit and a second beam generating unit, the first beam generating unit includes a first diaphragm, and the second beam generating unit includes a second diaphragm; the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam, the first diaphragm is used to generate the first sub-beam, the second diaphragm is used to generate the second sub-beam, and the area of the first diaphragm is different from the area of the second diaphragm.
  • the beam generating module includes a third beam generating unit, a fourth beam generating unit and a fifth beam generating unit
  • the first beam includes a third sub-beam, a fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam
  • the third beam generating unit is used to generate the third sub-beam
  • the fourth beam generating unit is used to generate the fourth sub-beam
  • the fifth beam generating unit is used to generate the fifth sub-beam
  • the third beam generating unit, the fourth beam generating unit and the fifth beam generating unit are in the same plane
  • the fifth beam generating unit is located between the third beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit
  • the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the third beam generating unit is different from the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit.
  • the beam generating module includes a sixth beam generating unit and a seventh beam generating unit, the sixth beam generating unit includes a third diaphragm, and the seventh beam generating unit includes a fourth diaphragm; the orthographic projection of the third diaphragm in the projection plane and the orthographic projection of the fourth diaphragm in the projection plane at least partially overlap, and the projection plane is parallel to the height direction of the speaker, or the projection plane is perpendicular to the height direction of the speaker.
  • the beam generating module includes an eighth beam generating unit and a ninth beam generating unit
  • the first beam includes a sixth sub-beam and a seventh sub-beam
  • the eighth beam generating unit is used to generate the sixth sub-beam
  • the ninth beam generating unit is used to generate the seventh sub-beam
  • the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam is different from the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  • the valve is an asymmetric valve, and the distance from the eighth beam generating unit to the channel is different from the distance from the ninth beam generating unit to the channel.
  • the speaker further includes a control circuit, and the control circuit is used to determine a transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam and a transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  • the beam generating module includes a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units constitute a beam generating unit array.
  • the speaker further includes a guide structure, which is located between the valve and the beam generating module.
  • the beam generating module includes a diaphragm
  • the guiding structure includes a first guiding structure
  • the first guiding structure includes an additional radiating surface
  • the additional radiating surface is connected to the diaphragm
  • the additional radiation surface includes at least one first curved surface, and an opening of the at least one first curved surface faces the channel.
  • the guide structure includes a second guide structure, the second guide structure includes a guide surface, the guide surface is located between the channel and the side wall of the shell; from one side of the guide surface close to the side wall to the other side of the guide surface close to the channel, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually increases.
  • the second guide structure further includes at least one connecting surface, the at least one connecting surface is connected to the guide surface, and the at least one connecting surface is connected to the valve and/or the housing.
  • the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, or the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing.
  • the number of the guide surfaces is multiple, the shell includes multiple side walls, and the multiple guide surfaces are respectively arranged corresponding to the multiple side walls.
  • the guiding structure also includes a third guiding structure, which is a metamaterial structure, and the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit, and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
  • a third guiding structure which is a metamaterial structure
  • the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit, and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
  • the first beam is an ultrasonic wave
  • the second beam is an audible sound
  • an electronic device comprising the speaker in the first aspect and possible implementations thereof, or comprising the speaker in the second aspect and possible implementations thereof.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a speaker provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 2 to 5 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the speaker provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS 6 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the speaker valve provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • 11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the beam generating module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 15 is a waveform diagram of different beams generated by the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 13 .
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 16 .
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 18 .
  • FIG. 20 is a waveform diagram of different beams generated by the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 18 .
  • 21 to 26 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of some further beam generating unit arrays provided in embodiments of the present application.
  • 27 to 29 are schematic cross-sectional views of the guide surface provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • 30 to 32 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the guide body provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • 33 and 34 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the additional radiation surface provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG35 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a metamaterial provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 36 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a loudspeaker including the metamaterial shown in FIG. 35 .
  • FIG37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another metamaterial provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a loudspeaker including the metamaterial shown in FIG. 37 .
  • Figure 39 is a schematic block diagram of a sound-emitting device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the vibration of the sound source can generate sound waves.
  • the vibration frequency range that the human ear can feel is about 20Hz ⁇ 20kHz
  • the intensity range is 0.00002Pa ⁇ 100Pa. Sound waves within this frequency range and intensity range can be called audible sound.
  • sound waves with frequencies between 20Hz and 500Hz are generally called low-frequency sounds
  • sound waves with frequencies between 500Hz and 2000Hz are called medium-frequency sounds
  • sound waves with frequencies above 2000Hz and below 16kHz are called high-frequency sounds.
  • Sound pressure level refers to the "effective sound pressure” measured on a logarithmic scale, relative to a reference value, with decibels (dB) as the unit.
  • the hearing threshold the minimum sound pressure or sound intensity that a human or animal ear can feel in a specific environment
  • dB decibels
  • the sound pressure generated by the diaphragm of a traditional speaker can be expressed as P ⁇ S ⁇ A, where S is the surface area of the diaphragm and A is the acceleration of the diaphragm.
  • the sound pressure P is proportional to the product of the surface area S of the diaphragm and the acceleration A of the diaphragm.
  • the relationship between the acceleration A of the diaphragm and the displacement D of the diaphragm can be expressed as A ⁇ f2 ⁇ D, where f is the angular frequency of the sound wave. Therefore, the sound pressure P can be expressed as P ⁇ f2 ⁇ S ⁇ D, where S ⁇ D can represent the air displacement V caused by the vibration of the speaker diaphragm.
  • the sound pressure P can be expressed as P ⁇ f2 ⁇ V, that is, the sound pressure P is proportional to the product of the square of the angular frequency f of the sound wave and the air displacement V.
  • the sound pressure P is positively correlated with the energy of the sound wave.
  • the energy input to the speaker can be converted more into the energy of the audible sound output by the speaker that can be perceived by the human ear.
  • the greater the sound pressure that can pass through the speaker and output the greater the sound pressure transmittance
  • audible sounds with lower frequencies the corresponding sound pressure is higher, and the speaker has a stronger ability to express low frequencies.
  • a loudspeaker also known as a horn, speaker, or amplifier, is a transducer or electronic component that converts electronic signals into sound.
  • Modulation is a technique that mixes one or more periodic carrier waves into the signal to be sent. Depending on the modulated signal, it can be divided into digital modulation and analog modulation. Modulation can change the amplitude and spectrum components of the signal, which is beneficial to the transmission of the signal.
  • Mechanical wave A phenomenon in which mechanical vibration propagates in space, which is a type of wave.
  • Sound waves are a type of energy that propagates in a medium, increasing and decreasing pressure through adiabatic processes.
  • the important physical quantities used to describe sound waves are sound pressure, particle velocity, particle displacement, and sound intensity.
  • Sound waves are a type of mechanical wave.
  • sound waves may include ultrasonic and/or audible sound waves, infrasound waves, etc.
  • Pulse wave also known as pulse wave or pulse
  • Pulse wave can be used to refer to a beam with rapidly changing signal characteristics (such as phase, frequency), the signal characteristics change from a baseline value to a higher or lower value, and then quickly return to the baseline value.
  • Metamaterials A class of artificial materials with special properties. The characteristics of this material come from its precise geometric structure and size. The microstructure and size scale of the material are smaller than the wavelength of the sound waves it acts on, so it can exert an influence on the waves.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a speaker and an electronic device using the speaker
  • the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a hearing aid, a smart wearable device, or other electronic device that needs to output audio through a speaker.
  • the smart wearable device can be a smart watch, augmented reality (AR) glasses, an AR helmet, or virtual reality (VR) glasses.
  • the speaker can also be used in the fields of whole house, smart home, car, etc., as an audio device or a part of an audio device.
  • the speaker 100A can be used as a sound-generating device of a wearable device (e.g., earphone 1000).
  • the speaker 2000 can include one or more speakers 100B, which can constitute a sound module of the speaker 2000.
  • the speaker 100C can also be used as a sound-generating device of a terminal device (e.g., tablet computer 3000) and installed inside the tablet computer 3000.
  • FIG. 2 to FIG. 5 are isometric views of a speaker 100.
  • the speaker 100 may include a housing 110, a valve 120, and one or more beam generating modules 140.
  • the speaker 100 may further include a guide structure 130.
  • the housing 110 may include a side wall 111 and a bottom 112.
  • the valve 120 may be located at a first end of the side wall 111, and the bottom 112 may be located at a second end of the side wall 111.
  • the first end and the second end are two opposite ends on the side wall 111.
  • the housing 110 and the valve 120 may enclose a receiving cavity 150, and the receiving cavity 150 may be used to receive the aforementioned guide structure 130 and the beam generating module 140.
  • the speaker 100 may be regarded as a box structure, and the aforementioned guide structure 130, the beam generating module 140 and other devices are placed in the cavity of the box structure.
  • these devices may be arranged near the bottom of the box structure, and an opening is arranged at one end of the box structure away from the bottom of the box structure, and the valve 120 is arranged near the opening.
  • the beam generating module 140 may be disposed near the bottom 112 of the housing 110.
  • the beam generating module 140 may be used to generate a first beam, which may be composed of a plurality of sub-beams.
  • the first beam may be a mechanical wave, such as an ultrasonic wave or an audible sound wave.
  • the first beam may also be referred to as a first sound wave.
  • the first beam may also be referred to as an initial beam.
  • the beam generating module 140 may be a transducer, which may convert an electrical signal into a vibration signal, thereby forming a first beam.
  • the first beam propagates in the cavity 150.
  • the first beam When the first beam propagates to the valve 120, at least part of the first beam propagates to the outside of the cavity 150 by controlling the switching frequency of the valve 120, thereby modulating the first beam.
  • the first beam propagated to the outside of the cavity 150 is the second beam, which may also be referred to as a second sound wave.
  • the valve 120 When the valve 120 is opened, the first beam may propagate to the outside of the cavity 150; when the valve 120 is closed, the first beam will not propagate to the outside of the cavity 150.
  • the beam generating module 140 may also be arranged in the middle of the cavity 150, or in other words, the beam generating module 140 may divide the cavity 150 into two sub-cavities, one of the two sub-cavities is located between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120, and the other of the two sub-cavities is located between the beam generating module 140 and the bottom 112 of the housing 110.
  • the beam generating module 140 is arranged close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110 as an example for introduction, and for the case where the beam generating module 140 is located in the middle of the cavity 150, reference may be made to the relevant contents of the following embodiments. It should be understood that the following embodiments take the beam generating module 140 being arranged close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110 as an example and should not constitute a limitation on the technical solution of the present application.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, each of which may be used to generate a sub-beam of the first beam, and the frequency, amplitude and other properties of different sub-beams may be the same or different.
  • the frequency, amplitude and other properties of the sub-beams generated by the beam generating units may be adjusted by adjusting the size and shape of the plurality of beam generating units. For example, the size of the beam generating unit may be increased so that a diaphragm with a larger area may be provided, thereby generating a sub-beam of the first beam with a larger amplitude.
  • the shapes, sizes, materials and other features of the multiple beam generating units may be the same, so that the frequencies, amplitudes and other properties of the sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units may be the same or similar, and the modulation method for modulating the first beam containing the multiple sub-beams may be simpler.
  • the shapes, sizes, materials and other features of the multiple beam generating units may be different.
  • diaphragms of different sizes may be set, so that the beam generating units at different positions generate different sub-beams, and the first beams composed of different sub-beams are different, and the second beams generated by the first beam after modulation will also be different. That is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted by setting the shapes, sizes and other properties of different beam generating units.
  • the frequency of the second beam may be lower than the frequency of the first beam, so that after the first beam is modulated, the second beam may fall within the frequency range of audible sound.
  • the plurality of beam generating units may be evenly arranged on a first plane parallel to the plane where the bottom of the housing 110 is located, that is, the intervals between two adjacent beam generating units are the same.
  • the plurality of beam generating units may be arranged on a first plane parallel to the plane where the bottom of the housing 110 is located.
  • the beam generating units are arranged non-uniformly, and the intervals between two adjacent beam generating units can be different.
  • the arrangement of the multiple beam generating units is different, and the properties of the first beam composed of the sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units will also be different, so the second beam formed by modulating the first beam, that is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 will also be different.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a diaphragm 141, and the plane where the diaphragm 141 is located may be regarded as the radiation surface of the beam generating module 140.
  • the diaphragm 141 may be a piezoelectric film, and when a voltage is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may be deformed, for example, the diaphragm 141 may be deformed in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, when the diaphragm 141 is deformed upward in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, the air diaphragm above the diaphragm 141 is pushed to vibrate upward, and when the diaphragm 141 is deformed downward in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, the air diaphragm above the diaphragm 141 is pushed to vibrate downward.
  • the reciprocating deformation of the diaphragm 141 between the zero point of deformation and the maximum point of deformation may drive the gas near the diaphragm 141 to vibrate, that is, the diaphragm 141 pushes the gas to propagate its vibration along a certain direction, that is, forming a first beam.
  • the diaphragm 141 may refer to the diaphragm 141 on each beam generating unit.
  • the size of the diaphragm 141 of the multiple beam generating units can be set according to the size of the beam generating unit, and a larger beam generating unit can be provided with a diaphragm 141 with a larger area.
  • the diaphragm 141 may be parallel to the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located, or it may form a certain angle with the plane where the bottom 112 is located.
  • the angles formed by the diaphragms 141 of different beam generating units and the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located may be the same or different.
  • the diaphragm 141 may be a flat diaphragm or a curved diaphragm with a certain curvature.
  • the area of the diaphragm 141 can affect the amplitude of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit, the angle between the diaphragm 141 and the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 can affect the propagation direction and propagation path of the sub-beam, and the setting of the curved diaphragm can converge the beams generated by different areas of the diaphragm 141 to a certain extent. Therefore, adjusting one or more of the properties of the diaphragm 141 can affect the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit, and further affect the first beam containing the sub-beam, and finally achieve adjustment of the second beam output by the speaker 100.
  • the guide structure 130 may be located in the accommodating cavity 150.
  • the guide structure 130 may be used to adjust the propagation direction and/or propagation path of the first beam, etc.
  • the guide structure 130 may achieve the above functions through a variety of different physical structures, interface shapes, etc., which are described in detail below.
  • the guide structure 130 may be located between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120.
  • the guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the beam generating unit 140 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 below, a connector is provided between the additional radiation surface and the diaphragm of the beam generating unit), or the guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110, or the guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the valve 120.
  • the guide structure 130 is connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110 and is located directly above the plane where the beam generating module 140 is located.
  • the valve 120 can be used to modulate the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to output the second beam, or in other words, the valve 120 can be used to change the frequency, phase and other properties of the first beam to obtain the second beam.
  • the valve 120 can be provided with a channel 121 for passing the first beam, and the channel 121 can be a channel formed by a slit or a channel formed by a through hole, etc.
  • the channel 121 provided on the valve 120 can be opened or closed in a certain manner (such as frequency), so as to realize the modulation of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • the frequency of the first beam emitted by the beam generating module 140 is fq1
  • the valve 120 can open the channel 121 according to the frequency of fq2, so that the frequency fq3 of the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be regarded as a function of fq1 and fq2, and adjusting fq2 can change the value of fq3, and this process can be regarded as the modulation of the first beam by the valve 120.
  • the realization of the modulation function of the valve 120 is further described below, and will not be described in detail here.
  • the sound pressure is positively correlated with the product of the square of the angular frequency of the beam and the amount of air propulsion.
  • the sound pressure is positively correlated with the energy of the beam. Therefore, the greater the energy of the beam output by the speaker 100 through the channel 121, the higher the sound pressure of the beam. Conversely, the smaller the energy of the beam output by the speaker 100 through the channel 121, the lower the sound pressure of the beam. In other words, for the same input beam, more beams can pass through the channel 121, and the sound pressure output by the speaker 100 is higher. That is, the greater the transmittance of the sound pressure at the channel 121, the higher the sound pressure output by the speaker 100.
  • the speaker 100 may be provided with a plurality of valves 120.
  • the beam generating module 140 is located in the accommodating cavity 150 of the speaker 100.
  • the accommodating cavity 150 may include a first sub-cavity 150A and a second sub-cavity 150B.
  • the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 may be propagated through the first sub-cavity 150A of the speaker 100 to the vicinity of the first valve 120A, and transmitted to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel on the first valve 120A to form a third sound wave.
  • the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 may also be propagated through the second sub-cavity 150B of the speaker 100 to the vicinity of the second valve 120B, and transmitted to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel on the second valve 120B to form a third sound wave. External space, forming the fourth sound wave.
  • a first guide structure may be provided between the beam generating module 140 and the first valve 120A, or in the space of the first sub-cavity 150A.
  • a second guide structure may be provided between the beam generating module 140 and the second valve 120B, or in the space of the second sub-cavity 150B.
  • One or more of the first guide structure 130A and the second guide structure 130B may be used to adjust the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • the first valve 120A can modulate the eighth sub-sound wave 142A generated by the beam generating module 140 to form a third sound wave; the second valve 120B can modulate the ninth sub-sound wave 142B generated by the beam generating module 140 to form a fourth sound wave.
  • the way in which the first valve 120A modulates the eighth sub-sound wave 142A can be the same as or different from the way in which the second valve 120B modulates the ninth sub-sound wave 142B.
  • the properties of the beam output by the first valve 120A (such as frequency or amplitude, etc.) can be the same or similar to the properties of the beam output by the second valve 120B (such as frequency or amplitude, etc.).
  • the speaker 100 can output similar beams to different directions in space through the same beam generating module 140, which is beneficial to improving the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker 100 and improving the effect of the speaker 100 outputting audible sound.
  • the first valve 120A and the second valve 120B can perform differential modulation on the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B, so that the speaker 100 can output beams of different frequencies or amplitudes, and the two beams can complement each other in frequency to enhance the effect of the speaker 100 outputting audible sound.
  • the first valve 120A and the second valve 120B have different modulation modes on the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B.
  • the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B can cancel each other out at a first position in the space and enhance each other at a second position in the space, so that the speaker 100 achieves a differentiated effect in the audio distribution in space.
  • valve 120 exemplarily show three possible structures of the valve 120 provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a top view of a speaker 100.
  • the valve 120 may include a first sub-valve 122 and a second sub-valve 123.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110, respectively.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are located in the same plane.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are equal in size and/or have the same shape.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are symmetrical about the symmetry axis OO′ of the plane where the valve 120 is located.
  • the valve 120 further includes a channel 121, which is located between the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123.
  • the channel 121 is in the shape of a slit or a strip, and the channel 121 can also be symmetrical about the symmetry axis OO' in the width direction (X-axis direction).
  • the width of the channel 121 or the width of the slit 121 is related to one or more of a plurality of factors such as the properties of the first sub-valve 122, the properties of the second sub-valve 123, and the properties of the beam generating module 140.
  • the valve 120 shown in FIG6 which is symmetrical about the axis of symmetry OO′, can be called a symmetrical valve.
  • the beam generating module 140 when the beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units, the propagation paths generated by the plurality of beam generating units to reach the channel 121 can be different, and the sound pressure near the channel 121 inside the speaker 100 can be compounded by the sound pressures corresponding to more different sub-beams, so that adjusting any one of the plurality of beam generating units can have different effects on the second beam output by the speaker 100, which is beneficial to expand the adjustable space for the second beam output by the speaker 100, and is beneficial to improve the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
  • FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the speaker 100, and FIG. 7 shows another structure of an asymmetric valve 120.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have different heights in the height direction (Z-axis direction) of the housing 110.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are not in the same plane (XY plane).
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are at different distances from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 (or the beam generating module 140).
  • the difference between the distance of the first sub-valve 122 from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 and the distance of the second sub-valve 123 from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 can be determined according to the material of the valve 120, for example, the difference between the two can be 0.2 to 2.0 times the maximum deformation of the material of the valve 120.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are equal in size and/or have the same shape.
  • the first sub-valve 122 is located away from the bottom 112 of the housing 110, and the second sub-valve 123 is located close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110.
  • the channel 121 is also located between the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123.
  • the channel 221 may also be in other shapes, such as a circular hole shape, a "well" shape, or a combination of multiple shapes (for example, a combination of a slit shape and a circular hole shape).
  • FIG8 is a top view of another speaker 100.
  • FIG8 shows another structure of an asymmetric valve 120.
  • the valve 120 is provided with a circular channel 121, and the geometric center A of the channel 121 does not coincide with the geometric center B of the valve 120.
  • Changing the shape of the asymmetric valve or changing the position and/or shape of the channel provided on the valve can change the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the channel 121, which is conducive to adjusting the second beam output by the speaker 100.
  • the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 can be propagated to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel 121, and when the channel 121 is closed, the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 is difficult to propagate to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel 121.
  • the transmittance of the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 near the valve 120 is high, and when the channel 121 is closed, the transmittance of the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 near the valve 120 is low.
  • the valve 120 may be a single-hole valve, and the valve 120 may include a baffle 124.
  • the baffle 124 When the baffle 124 is attached to a position corresponding to the channel 121 opened on the inner wall of the valve 120, or when the baffle 124 is covered on a position corresponding to the channel 121 opened on the outer wall of the valve 120, the baffle 124 may block the channel 121 opened on the valve 120, thereby closing the channel 121. Accordingly, when the baffle 124 moves away from a position close to the channel 121, the channel 121 is opened.
  • the speaker 100 may send a control signal to control the displacement of the baffle 124, thereby realizing the control of opening and closing the channel 121.
  • the baffle 124 may be connected to an electronic driver, and the control signal may be used to control the operation and stop of the electronic driver.
  • the electronic driver When the electronic driver is running, the electronic driver may push the baffle 124 to move along the P1P2 or P3P4 direction, so that the baffle 124 is attached to or covers the channel 121.
  • the baffle 124 may also be connected to a spring. When the electronic driver stops, the spring connected to the baffle 124 may move the baffle 124 away from the channel 121 during the process of restoring the deformation.
  • the valve 120 may be a piezoelectric material.
  • the piezoelectric material When a voltage is applied to the piezoelectric material, the piezoelectric material may deform in the direction of the plane where the material is located, in a direction perpendicular to the plane where the material is located, or in other directions.
  • the channel 221 opened on the valve 120 is closed or opened.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 shown in FIG10 may be piezoelectric materials, and the control signal for controlling the opening or closing of the channel may be a voltage signal applied to the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be deformed.
  • the deformation direction of the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be a direction close to the channel 121 or a direction along P5P6 in FIG10. At time t1, the channel 121 is in an open state.
  • the speaker 100 continuously applies a voltage signal to the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123, and the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are in a state of continuous extension, and the width of the channel 121 gradually narrows.
  • the opposite ends of the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 abut against each other, and the channel 121 is closed.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and/or the second sub-valve 123 When voltages in opposite directions are applied to the first sub-valve 122 and/or the second sub-valve 123 , the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are deformed in a direction away from the channel 121 , and the width of the channel 121 widens until it is fully opened.
  • valves can be used to modulate different types of first beams, and the valves can also cooperate with other functional modules in the speaker, such as the cavity structure of the speaker 100, to achieve the purpose of increasing the sound pressure of the target sound waves output by the speaker.
  • valve 120 only provide some possible structures of the valve 120 by way of example. Those skilled in the art can also summarize and deduce other modified structures of the valve 120 based on these examples. It should be understood that this part of the content should also fall within the scope of the present application.
  • Both symmetric valves and asymmetric valves can be used to modulate different beams generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • the beam generating module 140 provided in the embodiment of the present application is further described below.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include one or more beam generating units. When the beam generating module 140 includes only one beam generating unit, the beam generating module 140 may also be referred to as a beam generating unit 140 .
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a diaphragm 141, and the vibration of the diaphragm 141 may be achieved in a variety of ways.
  • the diaphragm 141 may be a piezoelectric material, and when an electric signal is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may produce different deformations according to the applied electric signal, thereby causing the air to vibrate accordingly to form a beam.
  • the diaphragm 141 may be a magnetostrictive material, and when an electromagnetic signal is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may produce different deformations according to the applied electromagnetic signal, thereby causing the air to vibrate accordingly to form a beam.
  • the beam generating module 140 may also include a moving coil, and the beam generating module 140 may control the vibration of the moving coil, and the moving coil drives the diaphragm 141 to vibrate through air transmission, thereby forming a beam.
  • FIG11 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a beam generating module 140, which includes a diaphragm 141 and a box body 143.
  • a beam generating module 140 which includes a diaphragm 141 and a box body 143.
  • One side of the box body 143 is open, and the diaphragm 141 covers the opening.
  • the interior of the box body 143 is a back cavity 144.
  • the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can reciprocate up and down the deformation zero point (point P8) under the action of the control signal.
  • the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can move from the initial position (deformation zero point or point P8) to point P7 (or the point of maximum positive deformation).
  • the diaphragm 141 When the diaphragm 141 receives an empty signal, the diaphragm 141 can restore the deformation, that is, point U can return from point P7 to point P8.
  • the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can move from the initial position (deformation zero point or point P8) to point P9 (or the point of maximum reverse deformation).
  • the diaphragm 141 When the diaphragm 141 receives an empty signal, the diaphragm 141 can restore the deformation, that is, point U can return from point P9 to point P8.
  • the reciprocating movement of the particles on the diaphragm 141 between the point of maximum positive deformation, the point of deformation zero, and the point of maximum reverse deformation can drive the air around the diaphragm 141 to vibrate, thereby generating a beam.
  • the beam generating module 140 when the beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units, the plurality of beam generating units may each include a diaphragm 141 and a box body 143.
  • the beam generating module 140 includes only one beam generating unit, or in other words, the beam generating module 140 includes only one diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may be connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110 of the speaker 100, or in other words, in this case, the housing 110 may be a box body 143.
  • FIG12 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which includes a diaphragm 141 and a support plate 145.
  • a notch 146 is provided on the support plate 145, and the diaphragm 141 can be covered on the notch 146.
  • the diaphragm 141 can reciprocate near the position of the notch 146, thereby driving the air around the diaphragm 141 to vibrate to generate a beam.
  • the support plate 145 is provided on the beam generating module 140, and the notch 146 is provided to provide a deformation accommodation space for the diaphragm 141, which is conducive to reducing the space occupied by the beam generating module 140 in the accommodation cavity 150 of the speaker 100.
  • a plurality of notches 146 may be provided on the support plate 145.
  • the plurality of notches 146 may be distributed on the support plate 145 in the form of an array.
  • Each beam generating unit may include a diaphragm 141.
  • a beam generating unit array may be formed.
  • beams are generated in both the upper space and the lower space of the diaphragm 141.
  • the beams in the upper space can propagate within a certain range of directions, and the beams in the lower space can also propagate within a certain range of directions. If the beams propagating within the above-mentioned certain range of directions are appropriately modulated, these beams can be converted into sounds (audible sounds) perceptible to the human ear.
  • the structure for modulating the beams generated by the diaphragm 141 can be set in the upper space of the diaphragm 141 or in the lower space of the diaphragm 141.
  • the speaker 100 shown in FIG. 5 above can output audible sounds from the first valve 120A to the external space, and can also output audible sounds from the second valve 120B to the external space.
  • the back cavity 144 can also be used to accommodate the aforementioned dynamic coil and a control circuit that outputs a control signal for controlling the vibration of the diaphragm, which is beneficial for the repair and maintenance of the beam generating module 140 .
  • the wave beam generated by the diaphragm 141 can be a mechanical wave (sound wave) or a pulse wave, such as a square wave, a triangle wave, a sawtooth wave, etc.
  • a pulse wave such as a square wave, a triangle wave, a sawtooth wave, etc.
  • Different modulation methods and/or modulation structures can be used for different wave beams.
  • FIG13 is a top view of the speaker 100, in which the valve 120 and the guide structure 130 are not shown.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units may form a beam generating unit array as shown in FIG13, wherein the plurality of beam generating units have the same shape, are equal in area, and are located in the same plane.
  • a beam generating unit array in which a plurality of beam generating units are evenly arranged to form 5 rows and 6 columns is used as an example for illustration, and the spacing between adjacent rows of beam generating units may be a, and the spacing between adjacent columns of beam generating units may be b.
  • a is a real number greater than or equal to zero and less than the size of the accommodating cavity 150 of the speaker 100 in the X-axis direction (or referred to as the width of the accommodating cavity 150)
  • b is a real number greater than or equal to zero and less than the size of the accommodating cavity 150 in the Y-axis direction (or referred to as the length of the accommodating cavity 150).
  • the specific values of a and b may be determined according to the size of the beam generating module 140 contained in the accommodating cavity 150, or according to the number and arrangement of the beam generating units contained in the accommodating cavity 150.
  • the distance between the beam generating unit and the channel 121 can be indirectly adjusted, and the propagation path of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit can be changed.
  • the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted.
  • FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array in FIG13 at the mm′ section.
  • the following takes the beam generating unit 140A and the beam generating unit 140B as examples to illustrate the propagation process of the beam between the beam generating module 140 and the channel 121.
  • the same beam generating unit can generate beams within a certain range of its upper space and/or lower space. Beams with different propagation directions may propagate to the channel 121. It can be understood that the propagation paths of beams with different propagation directions to the channel 121 are different.
  • FIG14 shows the propagation path of the beam generated by the geometric center of the beam generating unit 140A (hereinafter referred to as beam S1) to the particle E near the channel 121 and the propagation path of the beam generated by the geometric center of the beam generating unit 140B (hereinafter referred to as beam S2) to the particle E near the channel 121.
  • the length d1 of the propagation path of beam S1 to channel 121 is greater than the length d2 of the propagation path of beam S2 to channel 121.
  • the time taken for beam S2 to propagate to particle E is shorter, and beam S1 propagates The time taken to reach particle E is longer.
  • the time taken by beam S2 to propagate to particle E can be 1.25T, and the time taken by beam S1 to propagate to particle E can be 1.5T, where T is the period of beam S1 and beam S2.
  • the intensity of the sound pressure is generated by the gas molecules. The greater the vibration amplitude of particle E, the greater the sound pressure near particle E. When the beam propagates from medium A to medium B, the corresponding sound pressure transmittance of the beam is also greater.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the beam near the channel 221 can be adjusted by one or more of the path of the beam propagation to the channel 221, the initial phase of the beam, the beam propagation speed, etc.
  • the initial phases of different sub-beams generated by different beam generating units can be adjusted by controlling the time delays of the sub-beams generated by different beam generating units.
  • Table 1 exemplarily shows the time delays of the above beams S1 and S2.
  • Beam generating unit 140A generates beam S1′, and it still takes 1.5T for beam S1′ to propagate to particle E. In this case, after beam S1′ propagates 1.5T, it corresponds to R1′ on the waveform diagram.
  • the vibration amplitude is significantly improved compared to the value before the time delay is set.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the beam near channel 121 is also significantly improved.
  • the length of the propagation path of the sub-beams generated by different beam generating units to the channel 121 can be adjusted by adjusting the arrangement of the beam generating unit array, thereby changing the sound pressure transmittance of the first beam containing different sub-beams near the channel 121.
  • the row spacing or column spacing between two adjacent rows or columns of beam generating units near the channel 121 is smaller, and the row spacing or column spacing between two adjacent rows or columns of beam generating units far from the channel 121 is larger.
  • FIG16 is a top view of another loudspeaker 100, and FIG16 exemplarily shows an arrangement of an array of beam generating units.
  • a plurality of beam generating units can form an array of beam generating units with 5 rows and 6 columns.
  • the spacing between two adjacent columns of beam generating units is b, and the row spacing between two adjacent rows of beam generating units is different.
  • the row spacing between the first row of beam generating units and the second row of beam generating units is a2, the row spacing between two adjacent rows of beam generating units in the second row, the third row and the fourth row is a1, and the row spacing between the fourth row of beam generating units and the fifth row of beam generating units is a2, wherein a2 is greater than a1.
  • Adjusting the spacing between two adjacent beam generating units can indirectly adjust the distance between the beam generating unit and the channel 121, thereby affecting the propagation path of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit before and after the adjustment to the vicinity of the channel 121, which is conducive to adjusting the second beam output by the loudspeaker 100.
  • FIG17 is a cross-sectional view of the loudspeaker 100 shown in FIG16.
  • the length of the path d1 of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140A to propagate to the mass point E near the channel 121 will change, and the length of the path d2 of the beam generated by the corresponding beam generating unit 140B to propagate to the mass point E near the channel 121 will also change.
  • the change in the length of the propagation path will cause the change in the time taken by the beam to reach the mass point E, and accordingly, it will cause the change in the influence of the beam on the vibration of the mass point near the channel 221, that is, the adjustment of the sound pressure near the channel 221 is achieved.
  • the influence of the vibration of particles near the channel 121 can be adjusted by adjusting the size of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit in the beam generating unit array.
  • the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit near the channel 121 may be the largest, the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit near the side wall 111 may be smaller, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit between the two may be the smallest.
  • the diaphragm areas of the beam generating units are different, and the amplitudes of the sub-beams generated by them are different. That is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted by adjusting the diaphragm areas of different beam generating units.
  • the diaphragm area can be adjusted by setting diaphragms of different sizes for different beam generating units during the preparation of the beam generating module 140, or by chemically or physically treating the diaphragm of the prepared beam generating module 140 so that The diaphragm of the beam generating unit is partially or completely ineffective, thereby obtaining beam generating units with different diaphragm areas.
  • the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140 is etched by a chemical solution, and the diaphragm after etching is ineffective and cannot generate beams, while the diaphragm that has not been etched can generate beams normally.
  • the area after the diaphragm is etched can be called an invalid radiation area, and the area that has not been etched can be called an effective radiation area.
  • the aforementioned invalid radiation area refers to an area where a beam cannot be emitted.
  • the diaphragm in this area may be damaged after treatment or directly eliminated during the treatment.
  • the invalid radiation area is an area where a diaphragm exists before treatment but no diaphragm exists after treatment.
  • Fig. 18 is a top view of another speaker 100, and Fig. 18 exemplarily provides an array of beam generating units with different diaphragm areas.
  • the dimensions of the multiple beam generating units in the Y-axis direction shown in Fig. 18 are the same, and the dimensions of the multiple beam generating units in the X-axis direction may include c1, c2, and c3, where c3>c1>c2.
  • FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the mm' cross section in FIG18, and the size relationship of the diaphragm areas of the beam generating units 140A, 140B, and 140C is consistent with the size relationship of their dimensions in the X direction, that is, the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140C is larger than the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A is larger than the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140B.
  • the schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140A can be represented by L1 in FIG20
  • the schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140B can be represented by L2 in FIG20
  • the schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140C can be represented by L3 in FIG20.
  • the amplitude X3 of the beam L3 generated by it is also the largest accordingly, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A is between the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140C and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140B, accordingly, the amplitude X1 of the beam L1 generated by the beam generating unit 140A is also between X2 and X3. That is, the amplitudes of the beams generated by the above three types of beam generating units satisfy: X3>X1>X2.
  • the relationship between the amplitudes of vibration of particle E caused by beams L1, L2 and L3 is related to the amplitudes of the three beams, that is, the beam generated by beam generating unit 140C has the greatest impact on the vibration of particle E, the wave velocity generated by beam generating unit 140A has the second greatest impact on the vibration of particle E, and the beam generated by beam generating unit 140B has the least impact on the vibration of particle E.
  • the beam generated by beam generating unit 140C has the greatest impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121
  • the wave velocity generated by beam generating unit 140A has the second greatest impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121
  • the beam generated by beam generating unit 140B has the least impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121.
  • the influence of the beam generated by the beam generating unit on the vibration of the particle near the valve can be adjusted.
  • the greater the vibration amplitude of the particle the greater the sound pressure generated around the corresponding particle.
  • the higher sound pressure is conducive to the modulation of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 by the valve 120, so that the audible sound output by the speaker 100 retains more sound information and is easier to be perceived by the human ear.
  • the beam generating module included in the speaker may include multiple beam generating units.
  • the sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units together constitute the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • the propagation paths of the beams generated by the multiple beam generating units can be adjusted, so that more beams and higher energy of the beams can be converged at the channel, which is beneficial to improve the sound pressure of the target sound waves output by the speaker.
  • the present application also provides some beam generating modules 140 with different structures, as specifically shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 25 .
  • FIG21 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction in FIG21) of the plurality of beam generating units may be different, or in other words, the diaphragms included in the plurality of beam generating units are at different heights, or in other words, the diaphragms 141 of the plurality of beam generating units are at different lengths from the valve 120.
  • the height H1 of the beam generating unit farther from the channel 121 is higher, and the height H2 of the beam generating unit closer to the channel 121 is lower.
  • the upper surface of the diaphragm 141 can be a plane or a curved surface, the upper surface of the diaphragm can be placed horizontally or tilted, and the height of the diaphragm can be understood as the average height, lowest point height, highest point height or center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
  • the diaphragms of beam generating units at different distances from the channel 121 will have differences in the thickness direction of the speaker 100, thereby helping to adjust the propagation paths of the beams generated by different beam generating units and improving the utilization rate of the cavity space of the speaker 100.
  • FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view of another beam generating module 140.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating modules. Unit, the upper surface of the diaphragm 141 can be tilted relative to the bottom surface of the speaker, and the tilt angles of at least some of the diaphragms 141 are different. The angles formed by the diaphragms 141 of at least some of the multiple beam generating units and the bottom surface of the speaker (a side parallel to the XY plane and away from the channel 121) can be different. In other words, the normal directions of the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units are different.
  • the angle ⁇ formed by it and the bottom surface of the speaker 100 is larger; for the diaphragm of the beam generating unit close to the channel 121, the angle ⁇ formed by it and the bottom surface of the speaker 100 is smaller.
  • the propagation direction of the beams generated by the diaphragms of different beam generating units can be adjusted, which is beneficial for making the beams generated by different diaphragms propagate in the direction of the channel 121.
  • the number of reflections or scatterings required in the process of propagating to the channel 121 is relatively small, which is beneficial for increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the loudspeaker 100.
  • the height of at least part of the diaphragm 141 may be different.
  • the height of the diaphragm may be understood as the average height, the lowest point height, the highest point height or the center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
  • FIG23 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include multiple beam generating units, and the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units may be non-planar diaphragms such as curved diaphragms or arc diaphragms.
  • the multiple beam generating units are provided with curved diaphragms, and the surface of the curved diaphragms constitutes the radiation surface of the beam generating units.
  • the opening direction of the curved diaphragms or the direction of the radiation surface may be toward the channel 121.
  • Setting the diaphragms of multiple beam generating units as a non-planar structure is beneficial to converging the beams generated by different areas of the diaphragms on the beam generating units.
  • the converged beams can propagate toward the vicinity of the channel 121, which is beneficial to increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker 100.
  • the height of at least part of the diaphragm 141 may be different.
  • the height of the diaphragm may be understood as the average height, the lowest point height, the highest point height or the center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
  • FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140.
  • the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units are in different planes, or the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units are tilted.
  • the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units may be parallel to each other or may not be parallel to each other.
  • the orthographic projections of the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units on the projection plane may partially overlap or completely overlap, and the projection plane may be any plane parallel to the thickness direction of the speaker 100, for example, the plane where the side wall 111 of the speaker 100 is located.
  • one side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bottom surface of the speaker 100, and the other side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bracket 147.
  • the heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction) of the brackets 147 used to fix the plurality of diaphragms are the same.
  • the orthographic projections of the plurality of diaphragms on the side wall of the speaker 100 may all overlap.
  • one side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bottom surface of the speaker 100, and the other side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bracket 147.
  • the heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction) of the brackets 147 used to fix the plurality of diaphragms are different.
  • the orthographic projections of the plurality of diaphragms on the side wall of the speaker 100 may partially overlap.
  • the multiple beam generating units included in the beam generating module 140 in FIG24 can be arranged in a continuous manner, or in other words, there can be no gap between two adjacent beam generating units.
  • the arrangement of the beam generating unit array improves the utilization rate of the area of the bottom 112 by reducing the gap between the beam generating units in the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located, and on the other hand, by arranging the bracket 147, one side of the diaphragm is raised, which indirectly increases the area of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit, which is conducive to improving the sound pressure of the second sound wave output by the speaker 100.
  • the bracket 147 for fixing the diaphragm may be connected to a reflective surface on one side of the diaphragm close to the adjacent beam generating unit, and the reflective surface may be coated with a coating that is beneficial to beam reflection, so that the beam sent by the diaphragm can be reflected by the reflective surface and propagate in a direction close to the channel 221.
  • FIG25 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which may include multiple beam generating units, and the projections of the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units on a plane parallel to the thickness direction of the speaker 100 may overlap with each other.
  • the planes where the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units are located may intersect.
  • the diaphragms of the beam generating units located on one side of the channel 121 are parallel, and the normals of the diaphragms are all in the first direction, and the diaphragms of the beam generating units located on the other side of the channel 121 are parallel to each other, and the normals of the diaphragms are all in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are both in the direction of the channel 121.
  • the diaphragm of the beam generating unit is connected to the bottom surface of the speaker 100 on one side and to the bracket on the other side, so that multiple beam generating units can be arranged closely together, which is beneficial to improving the speaker 100.
  • the utilization rate of the bottom surface area also increases the area of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit to a certain extent by utilizing the space of the speaker 100 cavity, which is beneficial to improving the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
  • Fig. 26 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which may be provided with a plurality of diaphragms, which may be arranged in a stacked manner.
  • the beam generating module 140 includes a first diaphragm 141A, a second diaphragm 141B, and a third diaphragm 141C, which may be fixedly connected by a bracket 147, and the orthographic projections of the three diaphragms on the bottom surface of the speaker 100 may completely overlap or partially overlap.
  • the multiple diaphragms arranged on the same beam generating unit can be made of different materials, so that different diaphragms can have different performances.
  • the multiple diaphragms can generate different beams.
  • different electrical signals can be input to the multiple diaphragms arranged on the same beam generating unit, so that the multiple diaphragms generate different beams.
  • Stacking multiple diaphragms on the same beam generating unit along the thickness direction of the speaker 100 is beneficial to increase the diaphragm area of the same beam generating unit, and is beneficial to improve the utilization rate of the inner cavity space of the speaker 100.
  • different types of beam guiding structures 130 may be disposed in the cavity of the speaker 100 to adjust the sound pressure near the channel 121 .
  • FIG27 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 provided with the guide surface 131 along the X-Z plane.
  • the guide surface 131 can be used to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, so that the beam originally dispersed in the cavity of the speaker 100 can be converged to the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby improving the sound pressure and the transmittance of the sound pressure near the channel 121 to a certain extent.
  • the guide surface 131 can be used to gradually narrow the propagation space of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 from a position far from the channel 121 to a position close to 121, that is, the guide surface 131 is an inclined surface from the edge position of one or more beam generating modules 140 to the channel 121.
  • the guide surface 131 can include a first side close to the side wall 111 and a second side close to the channel 121, and from the first side to the second side, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually increases.
  • the side of the guide surface 131 close to the valve 120 can be connected to the inner wall of the valve 120 facing the inner cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the side of the guide surface 131 away from the valve 220 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100, or to the side of the beam generating module 140 facing the valve 220 (the side close to the diaphragm).
  • a guide surface 131 is provided in the inner cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the guide surface 131 is a plane. With the end of the guide surface 131 on the X-Z section shown in FIG. 27 away from the valve 120 and connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 as the origin of the coordinates, the coordinates of any point on the guide surface 131 have the following rule: as the x-coordinate value gradually increases, the z-coordinate value gradually increases. For example, the z-coordinate value of the point on the guide surface 131 can increase in proportion to the x-coordinate value.
  • the guide surface 131 can form a slope or an inclined plane, one side of the inclined plane can be connected to the valve 120, and the other side of the inclined plane can be connected to the side wall 111.
  • the angle formed by the inclined plane and the plane where the valve 120 is located can be an acute angle, and the angle formed by the inclined plane and the side wall 111 can also be an acute angle.
  • the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam incident on the inclined surface can propagate to a position close to the channel 121 after reflection from the inclined surface, that is, the propagation path of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam incident on the inclined surface to the channel 121 changes.
  • a guide surface 131 is provided in the inner cavity of the speaker 100, and the guide surface 131 is a curved surface.
  • the coordinates of any point on the guide surface 131 have the following rule: as the x-coordinate value gradually increases, the z-coordinate value gradually increases.
  • the ratio of the z-coordinate value of the point on the guide surface 131 as the x-coordinate value increases satisfies a certain functional relationship with the x-axis coordinate value.
  • the ratio of the increase of the z-coordinate value satisfies a linear functional relationship, a power functional relationship, an exponential functional relationship, etc. with the x-axis coordinate value.
  • a first connection position may be provided on the side of the valve 120 facing the accommodating chamber 150, and a second connection position may be provided on the inner side of the side wall 111 or the bottom 112 of the housing 110 of the speaker 100.
  • the aforementioned guide surface 131 is connected between the first connection position and the second connection position, and the first connection position and the second connection position may be smoothly connected or non-smoothly connected.
  • the guide surface 131 may be a smooth curved surface or a non-smooth curved surface provided with a bending portion or the like.
  • the angle between the guide surface 131 and the plane where the valve 120 is located at the first connection position and the angle between the guide surface and the plane where the side wall 111 or the bottom 112 of the housing 110 is located at the second connection position may affect the incident angle of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 incident on the guide surface, and further may affect the path of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam propagating to the channel 121. That is, the purpose of adjusting the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be achieved by adjusting the shape, position and the angle between the guide surface 131 and another plane at the connection position.
  • the guide surface 131 can be disposed on one side of the speaker 100, or in other words, a guide surface 131 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100. As shown in FIG. 27 or FIG. 28. Some side walls of the inner cavity of the speaker 100 are provided with guide surfaces 131, or the side walls of the inner cavity of the speaker 100 can be provided with guide surfaces 131. For example, when the inner cavity of the speaker 100 is cylindrical, and the inner cavity of the speaker 100 has an annular side wall, the guide surface 131 surrounds the annular side wall. When the inner cavity of the speaker 100 is a cube, the inner cavity of the speaker 100 includes four side walls connected in sequence, and the four side walls can be provided with guide surfaces 131. As shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 29 it is a cross-sectional view of another guide surface 131.
  • two oppositely arranged side walls are shown, and each of the two oppositely arranged side walls has a guide surface 131.
  • the shapes or types of the two guide surfaces 131 can be the same or different. In the case where the shapes of the two guide surfaces 131 are the same, the two guide surfaces 131 can be symmetrical about the symmetry axis of the speaker 100 in the XZ plane.
  • the above description of the shape of the guide surface 131 being a plane or a curved surface is also applicable to the case where the number of the guide surfaces 131 is multiple, or the guide surface 131 is an annular structure.
  • Providing two guiding surfaces 131 can further guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 , which is beneficial to further improve the modulation effect of the speaker 100 on the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 and improve the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100 .
  • the guide structure 130 can be applied to symmetrical valves (as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 ).
  • FIG. 30 shows a cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 .
  • the guide structure 130 is also applicable to asymmetrical valves.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have different heights in the Z-axis direction, and the second sub-valve 123 is arranged close to the beam generating module 140 relative to the first sub-valve 122.
  • the guide surface 131 can be arranged on a side close to the first sub-valve 122 or on a side close to the second sub-valve 123.
  • the arrangement of the guide surface 131 is conducive to guiding the multiple beams generated by the beam generating unit located on one side of the second sub-valve 123 to the side close to the first sub-valve 122, which is conducive to further improving the transmittance of the speaker 100 with an asymmetrical valve structure to the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 when the channel is open.
  • the guide structure 130 may also be a block structure, or referred to as a guide body 132.
  • the guide body 132 shown in FIG30 may include any of the aforementioned guide surfaces 131.
  • the guide bodies 132 including the guide surfaces 131 may be separate blocks, or the plurality of guide bodies 132 may be connected to each other to form a block.
  • the guide body 132 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100, and the guide surface 131 included in the guide body 132 can be used to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, so that the beam originally dispersed in the cavity of the speaker 100 can be converged to the vicinity of the channel 221 for corresponding modulation.
  • the guide body 132 can be used to make the propagation space of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 gradually narrow from a position far from the channel 121 to a position close to the channel 121.
  • the guide body 132 may form an integral structure with the housing 210 of the speaker 100, or the guide body 132 may be prepared by integral molding with the housing 110 of the speaker 100.
  • a structure that can adjust the beam propagation path and/or beam propagation direction is provided on the inner wall of the speaker 100.
  • a protrusion may be provided on the side wall of the speaker 100, and the protrusion may be accommodated in the cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the side of the protrusion close to the beam generating module 140 may be a guide surface 131, so that the protrusion may be used to adjust the propagation path and/or propagation direction of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • Preparing the guide body 132 and the housing 110 of the speaker 100 by integral molding is conducive to simplifying the assembly process of the speaker 100.
  • the integral molding method is conducive to improving the stability of the structural components of the speaker 100, the stability of the performance of the speaker 100, and the user experience.
  • FIG. 31 there is another cross-sectional view of a guide body 132.
  • the guide body 132 can form an integral structure with the valve 120 of the speaker 100, or in other words, the guide body 132 can be prepared by integrally molding with the valve 120 of the speaker 100.
  • one side of the thin plate-like valve 120 close to the beam generating module 140 is a guide surface 131 that can be used to adjust the beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
  • the valve 120 is the guide body 132, and the guide body 132 or the valve 120 can be in the form of a thin sheet. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have a guide surface 131 that has the function of adjusting the propagation path and/or propagation direction of the beam on one side facing the inner cavity of the speaker 100.
  • One possible implementation method is that the side of the guide body 132 or the valve 120 away from the inner cavity of the speaker 100 (or the outer surface) and the side close to the inner cavity of the speaker 100 (or the inner surface) are made of the same material (for example, piezoelectric material). In this way, when the valve 120 receives a control signal, both the inner surface and the outer surface of the valve 120 or the guide body 132 will deform.
  • Preparing the guide body 132 and the valve 120 of the speaker 100 by integral molding is beneficial to simplifying the assembly process of the speaker 100.
  • the integral molding method is beneficial to improving the stability of the structural components of the speaker 100, improving the stability of the performance of the speaker 100, and enhancing the user experience.
  • FIG. 32 a cross-sectional view of another guide body 132 is shown, and the guide body 132 may be an independent structural unit.
  • the housing 110, the guide body 132 and the valve 120 of the speaker 100 may be prepared separately and then assembled to form the speaker 100.
  • the guide body 132 may include a guide surface 131 and at least one connecting surface 133.
  • the at least one connecting surface 133 may be connected to the valve 120.
  • 120 is connected to the valve wall on one side of the speaker 100 cavity, or the at least one connecting surface 133 can also be connected to one or more of the two adjacent inner walls of the speaker 100.
  • the guide body 132 as an independent structural unit, is conducive to decoupling the multiple functional units included in the speaker 100, and is conducive to adjusting the performance of the speaker 100 by changing the structure, shape and other properties of the guide body 132.
  • different functional units are decoupled from each other, when a functional structure of the speaker 100 is damaged and needs to be disassembled and repaired, the speaker 100 provided by the technical solution only needs to disassemble and repair the damaged structural unit, which facilitates the repair and maintenance of the speaker 100 during use.
  • the guide body 132 can include more connection surfaces, the guide body 132 can be connected to other parts of the speaker 100 through these more connection surfaces, which can improve the reliability of the connection. Therefore, the guide body 132 is provided to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, which can improve the stability of the structure and performance of the speaker 100.
  • the above description about the guide body 132 is only introduced based on the example that the speaker 100 includes one guide body 132.
  • the speaker 100 includes multiple guide bodies 132, or the guide body 132 in the speaker 100 is annular in shape, the above description about the guide body 132 is also applicable. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the purpose of adjusting the beam propagation path and/or the beam propagation direction can also be achieved by adjusting the structure of the beam generating unit included in the beam generating module 140 of the speaker 100.
  • the function of the guide structure 130 can also be set on the beam generating module 140.
  • the guide structure 130 can be one or more additional radiation surfaces 134, and the additional radiation surface 134 can be connected to the diaphragm 141 of the beam generating module 140.
  • the setting of the additional radiation surface 134 can, on the one hand, converge the sub-beams generated by different areas of the diaphragm 141, and on the other hand, can also adjust the propagation direction of the sub-beams generated by the diaphragm 141.
  • FIG33 which is a cross-sectional view of another guiding structure 130
  • a guiding structure 130 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 .
  • the guiding structure 130 is an additional radiating surface 134A, and the additional radiating surface 134A is fixedly connected to the diaphragm 141A of the beam generating module 140 through a connecting member 135A.
  • a beam generating module 140 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units.
  • the guiding structure 130 may be a plurality of additional radiating surfaces 134B, and the additional radiating surfaces 134B may be fixedly connected to the diaphragm 141B of the beam generating unit via a connecting member 135B.
  • the vibration generated by the diaphragm 141 can be transmitted to the additional radiation surface 134 through the connecting member 135, so that the additional radiation surface 134 connected to the diaphragm 141 can generate the same or similar vibration as the diaphragm 141, so that the additional radiation surface 134 can also generate a first beam.
  • the additional radiation surface 134 can have a variety of different shapes and can also be made of different materials.
  • the additional radiation surface 134 can be used to converge the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 toward the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby improving the sound pressure transmittance of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 when the valve 120 of the speaker 100 is opened.
  • the additional radiation surface 134 may be a structure including a curved surface, such as an arc-shaped trough structure, an inverted upper structure, etc.
  • the curvature of the curved surface of the structure including the curved surface may be the same or different.
  • the opening direction of the curved surface of the structure including the curved surface may be toward the direction of the valve 120.
  • the opening directions of the multiple additional radiation surfaces 134 may be different. For example, when a through hole is provided on the valve 120, the opening directions of the multiple additional radiation surfaces 134 may all be toward the channel on the valve 120.
  • the number of the plurality of additional radiation surfaces 134 may be the same as or different from the number of beam generating units included in the beam generating module 140. In other words, the additional radiation surface 134 may be provided on each beam generating unit or on some of the beam generating units.
  • the resolution of the guiding structure for beam direction guidance can be improved, that is, the accuracy of beam direction guidance can be improved, which is beneficial to further converge the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby further improving the transmittance of the sound pressure in the valve opening state of the speaker 100.
  • the guidance of the beam by the guiding structure 130 can be achieved by changing the shape of the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140.
  • the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140 can be set to different shapes to achieve the guidance of the propagation direction of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, that is, adjusting the propagation direction of the beam to converge near the channel 121.
  • the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units may be arc-shaped, and the opening directions of the arcs may all be toward the channel 121.
  • the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different rows of the same column may be toward the vicinity of the channel 121 (as shown in FIG. 23 ), and the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in the same row (Y-axis direction) may be the same.
  • the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different rows of the same column may be Towards the vicinity of the channel 121 (as shown in FIG. 23 ), the directions of the arc-shaped openings of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different columns in the same row (Y-axis direction) may be different, and the directions of the arc-shaped openings of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different columns may all be toward the channel 121 .
  • the guiding structure 130 may be provided with more different structures to adjust the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating unit.
  • FIG35 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 , which may be disposed between the valve 120 and the beam generating unit and located in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 .
  • FIG36 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 including the guide structure 130 .
  • the guide structure 130 can be regarded as a metamaterial structure, and the guide structure 130 can be composed of a plurality of spheres or cylinders with different diameters, and the plurality of spheres can be continuously distributed in the Y-axis direction in FIG. 35 , or the plurality of cylinders can extend in the Y-axis direction in FIG. 35 .
  • the guide structure 130 can include a first cylinder 136A, a second cylinder 136B, and a third cylinder 136C, wherein the diameter of the first cylinder 136A is greater than the diameter of the second cylinder 136B, and the diameter of the second cylinder 136B is greater than the diameter of the third cylinder 136C.
  • the number of the first cylinder 136A can be less than the number of the second cylinder 136B, and the number of the second cylinder 136B can be less than the number of the third cylinder 136C.
  • the spacing between the three types of columns can satisfy the following relationship: the first column 136A can be adjacent to the second column 136B and/or the third column 136C, the spacing between adjacent first columns 136A is greater than the spacing between adjacent second columns 136B, and the spacing between adjacent second columns 136B is greater than the spacing between adjacent third columns 136C.
  • the gaps between the plurality of cylinders may form channels or paths for beam propagation.
  • the paths for the beam generated by the beam generating unit to propagate between the channels near the first cylinder 136A, the paths for the beam to propagate between the channels near the second cylinder 136B, and the paths for the beam to propagate between the channels near the third cylinder 136C may be different.
  • the guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 through the end faces or side walls of the structural units included therein, so that the guide structure 130 can be fixed in the cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the guide structure 130 shown in FIG35 when the structural units 136A, 136B, and 136C included therein are cylinders, the axial direction of the cylinder is the direction of the Y axis, and the end faces of both ends of the cylinder can be fixedly connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100.
  • FIG37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 , which may be disposed between the valve 120 and the beam generating unit and located in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 .
  • FIG38 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 including the guide structure 130 .
  • the guiding structure 130 can also be regarded as a metamaterial structure, and the guiding structure 130 can be composed of structural units of various shapes and/or sizes.
  • the guiding structure 130 may include a first structural unit 137A, a second structural unit 137B, a third structural unit 137C and a fourth structural unit 137D.
  • the first structural unit 137A, the second structural unit 137B and the third structural unit 137C are all in the shape of an "inverted F”
  • the fourth structural unit 137D is in the shape of a "soil”.
  • the dimensions of the four structural units in the X-axis direction may be the same or different, and the dimensions of the four structural units in the Z-axis direction may also be the same or different.
  • structural units of different sizes can be obtained by adjusting the dimensions of components in different structural units. For example, the height f4 of the first subcomponent and/or the width f2 of the second subcomponent of the structural unit can be adjusted.
  • the gap between two adjacent structural units can constitute a propagation channel (path) for the beam.
  • the lengths of different propagation channels can be different.
  • the length of the path along which the beam propagates in the propagation channel can be adjusted.
  • the length of the beam propagation channel between the two structural units can be adjusted by adjusting the spacing f1 between the two structural units along the X-axis direction.
  • the length of the beam propagation channel between the two structural units can be adjusted by adjusting the spacing f3 between the two structural units along the Z-axis direction.
  • the spacing between the two structural units in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction can be adjusted simultaneously to achieve the purpose of adjusting the length of the beam propagation channel.
  • the guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 through the end face or side wall of the structural unit included therein, so that the guide structure 130 can be fixed in the cavity of the speaker 100.
  • the end faces of the structural units 136A, 136B and 136C included in the guide structure 130 shown in FIG37 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 in the Y-axis direction, or the exposed surfaces of the two structural units on both sides (X-axis direction) of the guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 as connecting surfaces.
  • the guide structure 130 is arranged between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120, and the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 can be propagated through the inside of the guide structure 130 to the vicinity of the channel 121 arranged on the valve 120.
  • the guide structure 130 composed of structural units of different shapes, sizes and distribution methods is arranged, that is, the gaps formed between the multiple structural units constituting the guide structure 130 are used as beam propagation channels, and different propagation channels correspond to different beam propagation paths.
  • the path lengths of the beam propagation paths may be different, and the directions of the beam propagation paths may also be different.
  • the beam propagation path can be adjusted, and then the phase, direction, etc. of the beam propagation near the valve 120 can be adjusted, which is beneficial to adjust the transmittance of the sound pressure corresponding to the beam when the valve 120 is open, and is beneficial to improving the modulation effect of the speaker 100 on the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, and is beneficial to improving the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
  • the guiding structure is arranged on the path of the first beam propagating to the channel.
  • the guiding structure can adjust the propagation path of the first beam so that the first beam converges toward the channel, so that more beams and beams with higher energy can converge at the channel, so that the sound pressure of the beam before modulation is increased, and the sound pressure of the target beam output by the loudspeaker can also be increased to a certain extent, which is beneficial to improving the speaker's performance ability for audible sound, especially low-frequency audible sound.
  • the difference in the sound pressure intensity transmittance of the audible sound output by the speaker 100 before and after the improvement can be determined by software simulation.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the additional radiation surface is increased by about 200-400 times compared to the case where no additional radiation surface is provided.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the additional radiation surface is increased by about 50-500 times compared to the case where no additional radiation surface is provided.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the guide surface 131 is increased by about 20-100 times compared with the case where the guide surface 131 is not provided.
  • the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the guide surface 131 is increased by about 10-80 times compared with the case where the guide surface 131 is not provided.
  • the above embodiments provide a variety of methods for improving the quality of audible sound output by the speaker by adjusting the internal structure of the speaker.
  • These adjustment schemes can be coupled to each other or can be independent of each other and can be used in combination with each other. Moreover, compared with using only one of the multiple schemes, using multiple schemes at the same time can achieve better adjustment results, so that the speaker can output audible sound of better quality.
  • control signal of the beam generating unit, the arrangement of the beam generating unit, and the size of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit can be adjusted simultaneously to adjust the phase difference and amplitude of the beams generated by multiple beam generating units, so that the first beam propagation converges toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of increasing the output sound pressure of the speaker.
  • the present application also provides a sound-generating device 200, which can be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned speaker 100.
  • the sound-generating device 200 may include a beam forming module 210, a beam modulating module 220, a first control module 231, and a second control module 232.
  • the sound-generating device 200 may also include a beam steering module 240.
  • the sound-generating device 200 may output audible sound using one or more of the aforementioned functional modules.
  • the sound-emitting device 200 may receive first information 201 sent to the sound-emitting device 200 from an external source.
  • the first information 201 may be sound source information.
  • the first information 201 may include relevant information of the target beam 205.
  • the first information 201 may include frequency information and/or sound pressure information of the target beam 205 signal 205.
  • the sound-emitting device 200 may output the target beam 205.
  • the target beam 205 may be the second beam output by the aforementioned speaker 100.
  • the first control module 231 of the sound-generating device 200 receives the first information 201, and generates a first control signal 202 for controlling the beam forming module 210 according to the first information 201.
  • the first control signal 202 may be a voltage signal or an electromagnetic signal, etc., for controlling the vibration of the diaphragm in the aforementioned embodiment.
  • the beam forming module 210 generates an initial beam according to the first control signal 202.
  • the initial beam may be a sub-beam of the first beam emitted by the beam generating module 140 or the first beam generated by the beam generating unit in the aforementioned embodiment.
  • the second control module 232 of the sound-generating device 200 may be used to send a second control signal 204 to the beam modulating module 220.
  • the initial beam may be propagated to the beam modulating module 220.
  • the beam modulating module 220 modulates the received initial beam according to the second control signal 204, so that the sound-generating device 200 may output a target beam 205.
  • the sound emitting device 200 may store relevant information of the target beam 205 (e.g., frequency information and/or sound pressure information of the target beam 205) on a local storage medium of the sound emitting device 200.
  • the first control module 231 of the sound emitting device 200 may read the relevant information of the aforementioned target beam 205 from the local storage medium, and generate a first control signal 202 for controlling the beam generating module 210 based on the relevant information of the target beam 205.
  • a communication link 203 may be provided between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 , and the communication link 203 may be used to exchange information between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 .
  • the first control module 231 can send relevant information of the first control signal 202 for controlling the beam forming module 210 and the first information 201 received by the first control module 231 to the second control module 232, thereby facilitating the second control module 232 to determine the second control signal 204 for controlling the beam modulation module 220.
  • the second control module 232 can also send information related to the second control signal 204 and related information of the target beam 205 output by the sound-generating device 200 to the first control module 231.
  • the information related to the second control signal 204 can be used as feedback information, and the first control module 231 can use the feedback information to further adjust the first control signal 202 in the next cycle.
  • the information interaction and synergy between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 are conducive to improving the quality of the target beam 205 output by the sound-generating device 200.
  • One possible implementation method is that when the frequency of the target beam 205 output by the sound-emitting device 200 is low, the second control module can send the frequency information of the target beam 205 and the modulation method contained in the second control signal 204 to the first control module 231.
  • the first control module 231 can adjust the first control signal 202, for example, increase the intensity of the voltage corresponding to the first control signal 202, thereby increasing the frequency of the beam generated by the beam generating module 210, which is beneficial to increase the frequency of the target beam 205 output by the sound-emitting device 200 in the next modulation process.
  • the functions of the first control module 231 and the functions of the second control module 232 may be implemented by an independent physical circuit or a processing chip respectively, and a communication link may be provided between the two physical circuits or the two processing chips.
  • the first control module 231 can be regarded as a control module for controlling the beam generating module 140 in the aforementioned embodiment
  • the second control module 232 can be regarded as a control module for controlling the valve 120 in the aforementioned example.
  • the sound generating device 200 may further include a beam steering module 240, which may receive the initial beam generated by the beam generating module 210 and adjust the propagation path of the initial beam, etc.
  • the adjusted initial beam may be propagated to the beam modulation module 220.
  • the beam steering module 240 may change the propagation path of two synchronized (same phase at the same time) initial beams propagated to the beam modulation module 220, so that the phases of the two initial beams arriving at the beam modulation module 220 have a phase difference of one quarter of a cycle.
  • the beam steering module 240 may be disposed between the beam forming module 210 and the beam modulating module 220. Part or all of the initial beam generated by the beam forming module 210 may pass through the beam steering module 240 and propagate to the beam modulating module 220 for modulation, so that the sound generating device 200 outputs the audible sound 205.
  • the sound-emitting device 200 may include different beam guiding modules 240, and the structures and functions of different beam guiding modules 240 are different.
  • the function of the beam guiding module 240 may be realized by one or more of the additional radiation surface, curved diaphragm, guiding surface, guiding body, etc. in the aforementioned embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned sound-generating device 200 may include one or more beam forming modules 210, one or more beam modulation modules 220 and one or more beam steering modules 240.
  • the beam forming module 210 may also include one or more beam forming units
  • the beam modulation module 220 may also include one or more signal modulation units
  • the beam steering module 240 may also include one or more steering units.
  • Different signal generating units may generate initial beams of different frequencies, different amplitudes, and different propagation directions, and the same signal generating unit may generate different initial beams at different times.
  • Different steering units may have different adjustment effects on the propagation path of the initial beam, and different beam modulation modules may have different modulation effects on the beam.
  • Different signal generating units may generate different initial beams, that is, the initial beam may include one or more beams.
  • the sound generating device 200 may process these multiple beams to improve the effect of the target beam 205 output by the sound generating device 200.
  • the initial beam may be a pulse signal, or the initial beam may be a sonic wave signal.
  • the frequency of the initial beam may be greater than the frequency of the target beam signal 205.
  • the initial beam may be an ultrasonic signal, and the frequency of the initial beam may be greater than 20 kHz.
  • the initial beam may be an audible sound, and the frequency of the initial beam may be less than or equal to 20 kHz.
  • the sound-emitting device 200 can output the target beam 205 through one or more modules among the first control module 231, the second control module 232, the beam generating module 210, the beam modulating module 220 and the beam guiding module 230.
  • the target beam 205 outputted finally can be adjusted by adjusting the functions of one or more of the above modules.
  • adjusting the first control module 231 can change the signal output by the module for controlling the beam forming module 210, thereby affecting the generation of the initial beam;
  • adjusting the second control module 232 can change the signal output by the module for controlling the beam modulation module 220, thereby affecting the adjustment method of the beam modulation module 220 for the initial beam;
  • adjusting the physical structure for generating the beam contained in the beam forming module 210 can change the frequency, phase, amplitude, propagation direction, propagation path, etc. of the initial beam generated by the module, thereby affecting the generation effect of the target beam 205;
  • adjusting the physical structure for modulating the initial beam contained in the beam modulation module 220 can change the frequency, phase, amplitude, propagation direction, propagation path, etc.
  • the adjustment beam steering module 240 can change the propagation path, propagation direction, phase, etc. of the initial beam to a certain extent, thereby also affecting the output effect of the final target beam.
  • one or more of the above modules can be adjusted so that the sound device 200 can output the target beam.
  • the functional architecture of the sound-emitting device 200 shown in FIG39 should not be understood as a limitation on the physical structure of the sound-emitting device 200. That is to say, the same functional module of the sound-emitting device 200 can be implemented by one or more physical structures, and the same physical structure contained in the sound-emitting device 200 can also be used to implement different functional modules.
  • the multiple physical structures of the sound-emitting device 200 can be independent of each other or functionally coupled to each other.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Circuit For Audible Band Transducer (AREA)
  • Obtaining Desirable Characteristics In Audible-Bandwidth Transducers (AREA)

Abstract

A loudspeaker (100) and an electronic device. The loudspeaker (100) comprises a guide structure (130), a beam generation module (140), a valve (120), and a housing (110), wherein the valve (120) is provided with a passageway (121), the valve (120) and the housing (110) enclose a chamber (150) for accommodating the beam generation module (140), and the valve (120) is configured to modulate a first beam generated by the beam generation module (140). By means of providing the guide structure (130), the sound pressure of a second beam generated by means of the first beam modulated by the valve (120) is higher. The loudspeaker (100) has a high energy conversion efficiency and a high sound pressure transmittance, and the loudspeaker (100) and the electronic device, which comprises the loudspeaker (100), have a good performance capability with regard to low-frequency audible sound.

Description

扬声器和电子设备Speakers and Electronics
本申请要求于2022年09月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为2022112111063.2、发明名称为“扬声器和电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the China Patent Office on September 30, 2022, with application number 2022112111063.2 and invention name “Speaker and electronic device”, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference into this application.
技术领域Technical Field
本申请涉及终端电子设备领域,具体地,涉及一种扬声器和电子设备。The present application relates to the field of terminal electronic devices, and in particular, to a speaker and an electronic device.
背景技术Background technique
扬声器是一种输出可听声的电子设备,传统扬声器振膜的声压与振膜的表面积和振膜的位移成正相关。受限于扬声器的物理尺寸,扬声器内设置的振膜的表面积和振膜的位移都有限。对于频率较低的可听声,振膜产生的可听声的声压较小,不容易被人耳感知,这就导致了扬声器低频范围的表现不佳。A speaker is an electronic device that outputs audible sound. The sound pressure of a traditional speaker diaphragm is positively correlated with the surface area and displacement of the diaphragm. Limited by the physical size of the speaker, the surface area and displacement of the diaphragm set in the speaker are limited. For audible sounds with lower frequencies, the sound pressure generated by the diaphragm is small and not easily perceived by the human ear, which leads to poor performance in the low-frequency range of the speaker.
对于终端设备或移动设备上的尺寸较小的扬声器,可以通过先产生频率较高的波束,再对这些频率较高的波束进行适当的调制来产生声压在人耳听阈范围内的可听声。这种方法在一定程度上能够提高电子设备上小尺寸扬声器的低频表现能力,但由于需要产生频率较高的波束,这种方法也提高了对终端设备或移动设备的能量消耗。如何提高扬声器的能量利用效率,使得频率较高的波束经过调制后能够更好地转换为可听声是值得考虑的。For small-sized speakers on terminal devices or mobile devices, audible sound with a sound pressure within the human hearing threshold can be generated by first generating high-frequency beams and then appropriately modulating these high-frequency beams. This method can improve the low-frequency performance of small-sized speakers on electronic devices to a certain extent, but since it is necessary to generate high-frequency beams, this method also increases the energy consumption of the terminal device or mobile device. It is worth considering how to improve the energy utilization efficiency of the speaker so that the high-frequency beams can be better converted into audible sound after modulation.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种扬声器和电子设备,该扬声器内设置有引导结构,通过该引导结构,该扬声器内产生的第一波束经过阀门调制后输出的第二波束的声压更高,有利于提高扬声器的能量转化率,有利于提高扬声器对与低频可听声的表现能力。The present application provides a speaker and an electronic device, wherein a guiding structure is arranged in the speaker. Through the guiding structure, a first beam generated in the speaker has a higher sound pressure than a second beam output after valve modulation, which is beneficial to improving the energy conversion rate of the speaker and the speaker's ability to express low-frequency audible sounds.
第一方面,提供了一种扬声器,该扬声器包括:壳体;阀门,该阀门与该壳体围成腔体,该阀门开设有通道;波束产生模组,该波束产生模组位于该腔体内,该波束产生模组用于产生第一波束;引导结构,该引导结构位于该阀门和波束产生模组之间;In a first aspect, a speaker is provided, the speaker comprising: a housing; a valve, the valve and the housing enclose a cavity, the valve having a passage; a beam generating module, the beam generating module being located in the cavity, the beam generating module being used to generate a first beam; a guiding structure, the guiding structure being located between the valve and the beam generating module;
其中,该阀门被配置为打开通道或关闭通道来调制第一波束,该第一波束中的至少部分波束通过通道传播至腔体外形成第二波束。The valve is configured to open a channel or close a channel to modulate a first beam, and at least a portion of the first beam propagates through the channel to the outside of the cavity to form a second beam.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束的传播路径与腔体的形状和/或物理尺寸耦合,以使得第二波束的声压升高。阀门可以是对称阀门也可以是非对称阀门。In a possible implementation, the propagation path of the first beam is coupled with the shape and/or physical size of the cavity, so that the sound pressure of the second beam is increased. The valve can be a symmetrical valve or an asymmetrical valve.
波束产生模组产生的第一波束在腔体中传播的过程中会产生反射、散射等,通过设置引导结构来调整第一波束的传播路径、方向等,从而使第一波束的传播路径与腔体的物理尺寸等能够相互匹配,能够使得传播至通道处的第一波束在经阀门调制后得到的第二波束的声压升高,也就是扬声器将内部产生的波束的能量转化为可听声的能量的过程中能量转化效率提高,扬声器的声压透射率提高,有利于提高扬声器对于低频可听声的表现能力。The first beam generated by the beam generating module will produce reflection, scattering, etc. during the process of propagating in the cavity. By setting a guiding structure to adjust the propagation path and direction of the first beam, the propagation path of the first beam and the physical size of the cavity can be matched with each other, so that the sound pressure of the second beam obtained after the first beam propagated to the channel is increased after valve modulation. That is, the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker is improved in the process of converting the energy of the internally generated beam into the energy of audible sound, and the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker is improved, which is beneficial to improving the speaker's ability to perform low-frequency audible sounds.
本技术方案中,通过在扬声器的腔体内部设置引导结构,引导结构可以使波束产生模组产生的第一波束朝向通道处汇聚,从而可以在不对扬声器的阀门和波束产生模组进行改动的前提下,达到提高扬声器的能量转化效率、声压透射率的目的,既提高了扬声器腔体内空间利用效率,又避免了对于现有扬声器的阀门和波束产生模组的改动,有利于提升本技术方案对不同场景的适用性。In the present technical solution, a guiding structure is arranged inside the cavity of the speaker. The guiding structure can make the first beam generated by the beam generating module converge toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker without changing the valve and beam generating module of the speaker. This not only improves the space utilization efficiency in the speaker cavity, but also avoids changes to the valve and beam generating module of the existing speaker, which is conducive to improving the applicability of the present technical solution to different scenarios.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括振膜,该引导结构包括第一引导结构,该第一引导结构包括附加辐射面,该附加辐射面与该振膜连接。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a diaphragm, the guiding structure includes a first guiding structure, the first guiding structure includes an additional radiating surface, and the additional radiating surface is connected to the diaphragm.
在一种可能的实现方式中,波束产生模组可以包括多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元分别与多个附加辐射面连接,多个附加辐射面朝向通道。In a possible implementation, the beam generating module may include a plurality of beam generating units, the plurality of beam generating units are respectively connected to a plurality of additional radiating surfaces, and the plurality of additional radiating surfaces face the channel.
与波束产生模组的辐射面直接连接的附加辐射面,或者称附加辐射面可以与波束产生模组的辐射 面发生相同或相似的振动。本技术方案中,通过设置附加辐射面的方式来调整波束产生模组产生的第一波束的传播路径。方案可以基于现有的扬声器的波束产生模组和阀门实现,无需对现有的元器件进行替换、重新设计。附加辐射面的形状、大小等属性可以根据波束产生模组的属性设置,提高了方案的适用性。The additional radiating surface directly connected to the radiating surface of the beam generating module, or the additional radiating surface can be connected to the radiating surface of the beam generating module The surface undergoes the same or similar vibration. In the technical solution, the propagation path of the first beam generated by the beam generating module is adjusted by setting an additional radiation surface. The solution can be implemented based on the existing beam generating module and valve of the speaker without replacing or redesigning the existing components. The shape, size and other properties of the additional radiation surface can be set according to the properties of the beam generating module, thereby improving the applicability of the solution.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该附加辐射面包括至少一个第一曲面,该至少一个第一曲面的开口朝向通道。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the additional radiation surface includes at least one first curved surface, and an opening of the at least one first curved surface faces the channel.
本技术方案中,将附加辐射面设计为可以实现波束聚焦的形状,附加辐射面的凹面内各个位置产生的波束通过附加辐射面物理形状的改变实现在特定方向上的聚焦,当附加辐射面的开口方向朝向通道时,有利于升高通道附近的声压。本技术方案的实施有利于实现第一波束朝向通道处汇聚,达到提高扬声器输出可听声的声压的目的。此外,当波束产生模组包含多个波束产生单元,可以分别为多个波束产生单元设置多个附加辐射面,多个附加辐射面的属性可以根据每一个与之连接的波束产生单元的属性来设置,这样就可以实现对多个波束产生单元产生的波束的分别的引导,有利于进一步提高扬声器输出的第二波束的声压。In the present technical solution, the additional radiating surface is designed to be a shape that can achieve beam focusing. The beams generated at various positions within the concave surface of the additional radiating surface are focused in a specific direction by changing the physical shape of the additional radiating surface. When the opening direction of the additional radiating surface is toward the channel, it is beneficial to increase the sound pressure near the channel. The implementation of the present technical solution is conducive to achieving the convergence of the first beam toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of increasing the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker. In addition, when the beam generating module includes multiple beam generating units, multiple additional radiating surfaces can be set for the multiple beam generating units respectively, and the properties of the multiple additional radiating surfaces can be set according to the properties of each beam generating unit connected thereto, so that the beams generated by the multiple beam generating units can be guided separately, which is beneficial to further increase the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该引导结构包括第二引导结构,该第二引导结构包括引导面,该引导面位于该通道与该壳体的侧壁之间;从该引导面靠近侧壁的一边至该引导面靠近通道的另一边,该引导面与阀门之间的垂直距离逐渐缩小,该引导面与侧壁之间的垂直距离逐渐增大。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the guide structure includes a second guide structure, the second guide structure includes a guide surface, the guide surface is located between the channel and the side wall of the shell; from one side of the guide surface close to the side wall to the other side of the guide surface close to the channel, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually increases.
该引导面可以是曲面也可以是平面。在一种可能的实现方式中,引导面设置在扬声器壳体的内壁与通道之间,入射到引导面的第一波束可以被引导至靠近通道的一侧。The guide surface may be a curved surface or a flat surface. In a possible implementation, the guide surface is disposed between the inner wall of the speaker housing and the channel, and the first beam incident on the guide surface may be guided to a side close to the channel.
本技术方案中,通过在阀门和波束产生模组之间设置引导面,利用引导面来调整第一波束传播至通道的传播路径,使得第一波束在通道附近聚集,进而提高扬声器输出的第二波束的声压。In this technical solution, a guiding surface is set between the valve and the beam generating module, and the guiding surface is used to adjust the propagation path of the first beam to the channel, so that the first beam is gathered near the channel, thereby increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第二引导结构还包括至少一个连接面,该至少一个连接面与该引导面相接,该至少一个连接面与该阀门和/或该壳体连接。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the second guide structure further includes at least one connecting surface, the at least one connecting surface is connected to the guide surface, and the at least one connecting surface is connected to the valve and/or the housing.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该至少一个连接面与壳体的侧壁和/或底部连接。In a possible implementation manner, the at least one connecting surface is connected to a side wall and/or a bottom of the housing.
本技术方案中,第二引导结构设置至少一个连接面,通过该连接面与阀门和/或壳体连接,进而实现对于引导面的固定,有利于提高扬声器物理结构的稳定性以及性能的可靠性。In the technical solution, the second guide structure is provided with at least one connection surface, which is connected to the valve and/or the shell through the connection surface, thereby achieving fixation of the guide surface, which is beneficial to improving the stability of the physical structure of the speaker and the reliability of the performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第二引导结构与阀门一体成型,或者,该第二引导结构与壳体一体成型。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, or the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing.
当第二引导结构与阀门一体成型,该第二引导结构可以为薄片状,第二引导结构靠近腔体的一面可以为引导面。当第二引导结构与壳体一体成型,该第二引导结构可以为块状,该第二引导结构靠近波束产生模组的一面可以为引导面。When the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, the second guide structure can be in the form of a thin sheet, and a side of the second guide structure close to the cavity can be a guide surface. When the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing, the second guide structure can be in the form of a block, and a side of the second guide structure close to the beam generating module can be a guide surface.
本技术方案中,将第二引导结构与阀门设置为一体成型的结构,或者将第二引导结构与壳体设置为一体成型的结构,一体成型的结构更加稳固、牢靠。此外,多个组件一体成型可以简化扬声器的装配工序,有利于提高扬声器结构的一体性,有利于实现对于扬声器性能的定制。In the technical solution, the second guide structure and the valve are set as an integrally formed structure, or the second guide structure and the housing are set as an integrally formed structure, and the integrally formed structure is more stable and reliable. In addition, the integrally formed structure of multiple components can simplify the assembly process of the speaker, which is conducive to improving the integrity of the speaker structure and realizing the customization of the speaker performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该引导面的数量为多个,该壳体包括多个侧壁,该多个引导面分别与该多个侧壁对应设置。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the number of the guide surfaces is multiple, the shell includes multiple side walls, and the multiple guide surfaces are respectively arranged corresponding to the multiple side walls.
在一种可能的实现方式中,扬声器的壳体为长方体结构,引导面的数量可以为至少两个,该至少两个引导面可以分别与壳体的四个侧壁中的任意两个侧壁连接。In a possible implementation, the housing of the loudspeaker is a rectangular parallelepiped structure, the number of the guide surfaces may be at least two, and the at least two guide surfaces may be respectively connected to any two side walls of the four side walls of the housing.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,扬声器的壳体为圆柱状,引导面可以为环形结构,该环形结构的外壁与壳体的内壁连接。In another possible implementation, the housing of the speaker is cylindrical, and the guide surface may be an annular structure, the outer wall of the annular structure is connected to the inner wall of the housing.
本技术方案中,设置多个引导面,并围绕通道设置,波束产生模组位于腔体不同位置产生的多个第一波束可以更多地聚集到通道附近,有利于提高通道附近的声压,有利于提高扬声器的能量转化效率。In the technical solution, multiple guiding surfaces are provided and arranged around the channel. The multiple first beams generated by the beam generating module at different positions of the cavity can be more concentrated near the channel, which is beneficial to increase the sound pressure near the channel and improve the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该引导结构还包括第三引导结构,该第三引导结构为超材料结构,该第三引导结构包括第一结构单元、第二结构单元和第三结构单元,该第一结构单元与该第二结构单元之间设置有用于第一波束传播的第一通路,该第二结构单元与第三结构单元之间设置有用于第一波束传播的第二通路,该第一通路与该第二通路不同。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the guiding structure also includes a third guiding structure, the third guiding structure is a metamaterial structure, the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
超材料结构可以包含不同的结构单元,同种结构单元可以按照不同的分布方式排布,不同的结构 单元之间可以具有不同的形状、大小和分布方式。本技术方案中,在腔体内设置超材料结构用于调整第一波束中多个波束的传播路径,有利于提高扬声器腔体空间的利用率,有利于提升扬声器输出的可听声的声压,有利于提升扬声器对于低频可听声的表现能力。Metamaterial structures can contain different structural units. The same structural units can be arranged in different distribution modes. The units may have different shapes, sizes and distribution patterns. In this technical solution, a metamaterial structure is arranged in the cavity to adjust the propagation paths of multiple beams in the first beam, which is beneficial to improving the utilization rate of the speaker cavity space, improving the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker, and improving the speaker's ability to express low-frequency audible sound.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括振膜,该振膜面向该通道。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a diaphragm facing the channel.
当振膜为平面时,该振膜面向通道可以理解为振膜的法向朝向通道;当振膜为曲面时,振膜面向通道可以理解为曲面上不同区域产生的波束汇聚后,波束传播的方向朝向该通道。When the diaphragm is a plane, the diaphragm facing the channel can be understood as the normal of the diaphragm facing the channel; when the diaphragm is a curved surface, the diaphragm facing the channel can be understood as the direction of beam propagation facing the channel after the beams generated by different areas on the curved surface converge.
通过调整波束产生模组来实现波束产生模组产生的第一波束朝向通道处汇聚。本技术方案中调整波束产生模组的辐射面的方向,以使得辐射面传播的波束能够朝通道传播,更多的第一波束可以汇聚到通道附近,从而有利于提高扬声器输出的波束的声压和扬声器的能量转化效率。The first beam generated by the beam generating module is converged toward the channel by adjusting the beam generating module. In the technical solution, the direction of the radiation surface of the beam generating module is adjusted so that the beam propagated by the radiation surface can propagate toward the channel, and more first beams can converge near the channel, which is beneficial to improving the sound pressure of the beam output by the speaker and the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该振膜包括至少一个第二曲面,该至少一个第二曲面的开口朝向通道。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the diaphragm includes at least one second curved surface, and an opening of the at least one second curved surface faces the channel.
本技术方案中,通过改变波束产生模组的形状,以使得波束产生模组产生的多个波束能够在通道处聚集,有利于提高扬声器输出的波束的声压和扬声器的能量转化效率。In the present technical solution, by changing the shape of the beam generating module, multiple beams generated by the beam generating module can be gathered at the channel, which is beneficial to improving the sound pressure of the beam output by the speaker and the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第一波束产生单元和第二波束产生单元,该第一波束产生单元包括第一振膜,该第二波束产生单元包括第二振膜;该第一波束包括第一子波束和第二子波束,该第一振膜用于产生该第一子波束,该第二振膜用于产生该第二子波束,该第一振膜的面积与该第二振膜的面积不同。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a first beam generating unit and a second beam generating unit, the first beam generating unit includes a first diaphragm, and the second beam generating unit includes a second diaphragm; the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam, the first diaphragm is used to generate the first sub-beam, the second diaphragm is used to generate the second sub-beam, and the area of the first diaphragm is different from the area of the second diaphragm.
不同辐射面面积的波束产生单元产生的波束的能量不同。本技术方案中,波束产生模组可以设置多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元的辐射面面积可以不同,与通道距离不同的波束产生单元可以设置不同面积的辐射面,以产生多个能量不同的波束,多个波能量不同的波束在通道附近汇聚有利于进一步提高扬声器的能量转化效率以及声压的透射率。The beams generated by beam generating units with different radiation surface areas have different energies. In the present technical solution, the beam generating module can be provided with multiple beam generating units, and the radiation surface areas of the multiple beam generating units can be different. Beam generating units with different distances from the channel can be provided with radiation surfaces of different areas to generate multiple beams with different energies. The convergence of multiple beams with different energies near the channel is conducive to further improving the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker and the transmittance of sound pressure.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第三波束产生单元、第四波束产生单元和第五波束产生单元,该第一波束包括第三子波束、第四子波束和第五子波束,该第三波束产生单元用于产生第三子波束,该第四波束产生单元用于产生第四子波束,该第五波束产生单元用于产生第五子波束;该第三波束产生单元、该第四波束产生单元和该第五波束产生单元处于同一平面内,该第五波束产生单元位于该第三波束产生单元和该第四波束产生单元之间,该第五波束产生单元和该第三波束产生单元之间的间距与该五波束产生单元和该第四波束产生单元之间的间距不同。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a third beam generating unit, a fourth beam generating unit and a fifth beam generating unit, the first beam includes a third sub-beam, a fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam, the third beam generating unit is used to generate the third sub-beam, the fourth beam generating unit is used to generate the fourth sub-beam, and the fifth beam generating unit is used to generate the fifth sub-beam; the third beam generating unit, the fourth beam generating unit and the fifth beam generating unit are in the same plane, the fifth beam generating unit is located between the third beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit, and the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the third beam generating unit is different from the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit.
相邻两个波束产生单元之间的间距可以理解为相邻两个波束产生单元包含的两个振膜之间的间距,用于固定相邻两个波束产生单元的振膜的支架之间的间距。The distance between two adjacent beam generating units can be understood as the distance between two diaphragms included in two adjacent beam generating units, and the distance between brackets for fixing the diaphragms of two adjacent beam generating units.
本技术方案中,通过调整相邻的波束产生单元之间的间距来实现对于波束产生单元产生的波束的传播路径的调整。相较于包含相同数量均匀分布波束产生单元的波束产生模组,本技术方案可以在不增加波束产生单元的基础上达到提高输出声压的目的,有利于简化扬声器的内部结构,有利于扬声器或包含扬声器的电子设备的维修和维护。In the present technical solution, the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating unit is adjusted by adjusting the spacing between adjacent beam generating units. Compared with a beam generating module including the same number of uniformly distributed beam generating units, the present technical solution can achieve the purpose of increasing the output sound pressure without increasing the number of beam generating units, which is conducive to simplifying the internal structure of the speaker and facilitating the repair and maintenance of the speaker or an electronic device including the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第六波束产生单元和第七波束产生单元,该第六波束产生单元包括第三振膜,该第七波束产生单元包括第四振膜;该第三振膜在投影平面内的正投影和该第四振膜在该投影平面内的正投影至少部分重叠,该投影平面与该扬声器的高度方向平行,或者,该投影平面与该扬声器的高度方向垂直。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a sixth beam generating unit and a seventh beam generating unit, the sixth beam generating unit includes a third diaphragm, and the seventh beam generating unit includes a fourth diaphragm; the orthographic projection of the third diaphragm in the projection plane and the orthographic projection of the fourth diaphragm in the projection plane at least partially overlap, and the projection plane is parallel to the height direction of the speaker, or the projection plane is perpendicular to the height direction of the speaker.
本技术方案中,将第一振膜和第二振膜在投影平面内的正投影至少部分重叠,可以进一步利用扬声器腔体内的空间,进而可以在扬声器腔体内布置更大辐射面积的波束产生模组,有利于提高对于扬声器腔体空间的利用率,有利于进一步提高扬声器输出的第二波束的声压。结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第八波束产生单元和第九波束产生单元,该第一波束包括第六子波束和第七子波束,该第八波束产生单元用于产生第六子波束,该第九波束产生单元用于产生第七子波束,该第六子波束的发送时延和该第七子波束的发送时延不同。In the present technical solution, the orthographic projections of the first diaphragm and the second diaphragm in the projection plane are at least partially overlapped, so that the space in the speaker cavity can be further utilized, and a beam generating module with a larger radiation area can be arranged in the speaker cavity, which is beneficial to improve the utilization rate of the speaker cavity space and further improve the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker. In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes an eighth beam generating unit and a ninth beam generating unit, the first beam includes a sixth sub-beam and a seventh sub-beam, the eighth beam generating unit is used to generate the sixth sub-beam, and the ninth beam generating unit is used to generate the seventh sub-beam, and the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam is different from the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该阀门为非对称阀门,该第八波束产生单元到通道的距离与第九波束产生单元到通道的距离不同。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the valve is an asymmetric valve, and a distance from the eighth beam generating unit to the channel is different from a distance from the ninth beam generating unit to the channel.
本技术方案中,考虑不同的波束产生单元可以与非对称阀门上的通道距离不同,为了更好地提高第二波束输出的声压,可以用过为不同的波束产生单元设置不同的发送时延的方式,改变不同波束产 生单元产生波束到达通道的相位差。In this technical solution, considering that different beam generating units may be at different distances from the channel on the asymmetric valve, in order to better improve the sound pressure output by the second beam, different transmission delays may be set for different beam generating units to change the transmission delays of different beam generating units. The generating unit generates the phase difference of the beam arriving at the channel.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该扬声器还包括控制电路,该控制电路用于确定该第六子波束的发送时延和该第七子波束的发送时延。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the speaker further includes a control circuit, and the control circuit is used to determine a transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam and a transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
多个波束的发送时延不同,则多个波束到达通道附近时的到达相位不同。本技术方案中,可以通过控制第一波束中包含的多个波束的发送的时延来调整多个波束到达通道附近的相位,有利于实现多个波束的相位叠加,避免多个波束的相位抵消,有利于进一步提高扬声器的能量转化效率以及声压透射率。If the transmission delays of multiple beams are different, the arrival phases of the multiple beams when they arrive near the channel are different. In this technical solution, the phases of the multiple beams arriving near the channel can be adjusted by controlling the transmission delays of the multiple beams included in the first beam, which is conducive to achieving phase superposition of multiple beams and avoiding phase cancellation of multiple beams, which is conducive to further improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括多个波束产生的单元,该多个波束产生的单元组成波束产生单元阵列。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the beam generating module includes a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units constitute a beam generating unit array.
本技术方案中,扬声器内可以设置多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元可以组成阵列,以阵列形式排布的多个波束产生单元可以在腔体内沿各个方向发送第一波束,不同第一波束的传播路径不同。本技术方案的实施有利于提高多个波束产生单元产生的波束汇聚及相位叠加的机率,有利于提高扬声器的能量转化效率以及声压透射率。In this technical solution, multiple beam generating units can be arranged in the speaker, and the multiple beam generating units can form an array. The multiple beam generating units arranged in the array can send the first beam in various directions in the cavity, and the propagation paths of different first beams are different. The implementation of this technical solution is conducive to improving the probability of beam convergence and phase superposition generated by multiple beam generating units, and is conducive to improving the energy conversion efficiency and sound pressure transmittance of the speaker.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束为超声波,该第二波束为可听声。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first beam is an ultrasonic wave, and the second beam is an audible sound.
以下技术方案中的有益效果和相关解释可以参考第一方面的相关内容,为了简洁,以下不再赘述。The beneficial effects and related explanations in the following technical solutions can refer to the relevant contents of the first aspect, and for the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated below.
第二方面,提供了一种扬声器,该扬声器包括:壳体;阀门,该阀门与该壳体围成腔体,该阀门开设有通道;波束产生模组,该波束产生模组位于该腔体内,该波束产生模组用于产生第一波束;其中,该阀门被配置为打开通道或关闭通道来调制第一波束,该第一波束中的至少部分波束通过通道传播至腔体外形成第二波束。In a second aspect, a speaker is provided, comprising: a shell; a valve, the valve and the shell forming a cavity, the valve having a channel; a beam generating module, the beam generating module being located in the cavity, the beam generating module being used to generate a first beam; wherein the valve is configured to open the channel or close the channel to modulate the first beam, and at least part of the first beam propagates through the channel to the outside of the cavity to form a second beam.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括振膜,该振膜面向该通道。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a diaphragm facing the channel.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该振膜包括至少一个第二曲面,该至少一个第二曲面的开口朝向通道。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the diaphragm includes at least one second curved surface, and an opening of the at least one second curved surface faces the channel.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第一波束产生单元和第二波束产生单元,该第一波束产生单元包括第一振膜,该第二波束产生单元包括第二振膜;该第一波束包括第一子波束和第二子波束,该第一振膜用于产生该第一子波束,该第二振膜用于产生该第二子波束,该第一振膜的面积与该第二振膜的面积不同。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a first beam generating unit and a second beam generating unit, the first beam generating unit includes a first diaphragm, and the second beam generating unit includes a second diaphragm; the first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam, the first diaphragm is used to generate the first sub-beam, the second diaphragm is used to generate the second sub-beam, and the area of the first diaphragm is different from the area of the second diaphragm.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第三波束产生单元、第四波束产生单元和第五波束产生单元,该第一波束包括第三子波束、第四子波束和第五子波束,该第三波束产生单元用于产生第三子波束,该第四波束产生单元用于产生第四子波束,该第五波束产生单元用于产生第五子波束;该第三波束产生单元、该第四波束产生单元和该第五波束产生单元处于同一平面内,该第五波束产生单元位于该第三波束产生单元和该第四波束产生单元之间,该第五波束产生单元和该第三波束产生单元之间的间距与该五波束产生单元和该第四波束产生单元之间的间距不同。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a third beam generating unit, a fourth beam generating unit and a fifth beam generating unit, the first beam includes a third sub-beam, a fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam, the third beam generating unit is used to generate the third sub-beam, the fourth beam generating unit is used to generate the fourth sub-beam, and the fifth beam generating unit is used to generate the fifth sub-beam; the third beam generating unit, the fourth beam generating unit and the fifth beam generating unit are in the same plane, the fifth beam generating unit is located between the third beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit, and the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the third beam generating unit is different from the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第六波束产生单元和第七波束产生单元,该第六波束产生单元包括第三振膜,该第七波束产生单元包括第四振膜;该第三振膜在投影平面内的正投影和该第四振膜在该投影平面内的正投影至少部分重叠,该投影平面与该扬声器的高度方向平行,或者,该投影平面与该扬声器的高度方向垂直。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a sixth beam generating unit and a seventh beam generating unit, the sixth beam generating unit includes a third diaphragm, and the seventh beam generating unit includes a fourth diaphragm; the orthographic projection of the third diaphragm in the projection plane and the orthographic projection of the fourth diaphragm in the projection plane at least partially overlap, and the projection plane is parallel to the height direction of the speaker, or the projection plane is perpendicular to the height direction of the speaker.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括第八波束产生单元和第九波束产生单元,该第一波束包括第六子波束和第七子波束,该第八波束产生单元用于产生第六子波束,该第九波束产生单元用于产生第七子波束,该第六子波束的发送时延和该第七子波束的发送时延不同。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes an eighth beam generating unit and a ninth beam generating unit, the first beam includes a sixth sub-beam and a seventh sub-beam, the eighth beam generating unit is used to generate the sixth sub-beam, the ninth beam generating unit is used to generate the seventh sub-beam, and the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam is different from the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该阀门为非对称阀门,该第八波束产生单元到通道的距离与第九波束产生单元到通道的距离不同。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the valve is an asymmetric valve, and the distance from the eighth beam generating unit to the channel is different from the distance from the ninth beam generating unit to the channel.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该扬声器还包括控制电路,该控制电路用于确定该第六子波束的发送时延和该第七子波束的发送时延。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the speaker further includes a control circuit, and the control circuit is used to determine a transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam and a transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括多个波束产生的单元,该多个波束产生的单元组成波束产生单元阵列。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units constitute a beam generating unit array.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该扬声器还包括引导结构,该引导结构位于阀门和波束产生模组之间。 In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the speaker further includes a guide structure, which is located between the valve and the beam generating module.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该波束产生模组包括振膜,该引导结构包括第一引导结构,该第一引导结构包括附加辐射面,该附加辐射面与该振膜连接。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the beam generating module includes a diaphragm, the guiding structure includes a first guiding structure, the first guiding structure includes an additional radiating surface, and the additional radiating surface is connected to the diaphragm.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该附加辐射面包括至少一个第一曲面,该至少一个第一曲面的开口朝向通道。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the additional radiation surface includes at least one first curved surface, and an opening of the at least one first curved surface faces the channel.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该引导结构包括第二引导结构,该第二引导结构包括引导面,该引导面位于该通道与该壳体的侧壁之间;从该引导面靠近侧壁的一边至该引导面靠近通道的另一边,该引导面与阀门之间的垂直距离逐渐缩小,该引导面与侧壁之间的垂直距离逐渐增大。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the guide structure includes a second guide structure, the second guide structure includes a guide surface, the guide surface is located between the channel and the side wall of the shell; from one side of the guide surface close to the side wall to the other side of the guide surface close to the channel, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually increases.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第二引导结构还包括至少一个连接面,该至少一个连接面与该引导面相接,该至少一个连接面与该阀门和/或该壳体连接。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the second guide structure further includes at least one connecting surface, the at least one connecting surface is connected to the guide surface, and the at least one connecting surface is connected to the valve and/or the housing.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第二引导结构与阀门一体成型,或者,该第二引导结构与壳体一体成型。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve, or the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该引导面的数量为多个,该壳体包括多个侧壁,该多个引导面分别与该多个侧壁对应设置。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the number of the guide surfaces is multiple, the shell includes multiple side walls, and the multiple guide surfaces are respectively arranged corresponding to the multiple side walls.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该引导结构还包括第三引导结构,该第三引导结构为超材料结构,该第三引导结构包括第一结构单元、第二结构单元和第三结构单元,该第一结构单元与该第二结构单元之间设置有用于第一波束传播的第一通路,该第二结构单元与第三结构单元之间设置有用于第一波束传播的第二通路,该第一通路与该第二通路不同。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the guiding structure also includes a third guiding structure, which is a metamaterial structure, and the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit, and a third structural unit, a first path for first beam propagation is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for first beam propagation is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该第一波束为超声波,该第二波束为可听声。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the first beam is an ultrasonic wave, and the second beam is an audible sound.
第三方面,提供了一种电子设备,包括第一方面及其可能的实现方式中的扬声器,或者,包括第二方面及其可能的实现方式中的扬声器。In a third aspect, an electronic device is provided, comprising the speaker in the first aspect and possible implementations thereof, or comprising the speaker in the second aspect and possible implementations thereof.
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种扬声器的应用场景示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of a speaker provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图2至图5是本申请实施例提供的扬声器的结构示意图。2 to 5 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the speaker provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图6至图10是本申请实施例提供的扬声器阀门的结构示意图。6 to 10 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the speaker valve provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图11和图12是本申请实施例提供的波束产生模组的结构示意图。11 and 12 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the beam generating module provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图13是本申请实施例提供的一种波束产生单元阵列的示意图。FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图14是图13所示的波束产生单元阵列的截面示意图。FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 13 .
图15是图13所示的波束产生单元阵列产生的不同波束的波形图。FIG. 15 is a waveform diagram of different beams generated by the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 13 .
图16是本申请实施例提供的另一种波束产生单元阵列的示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of another beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图17是图16所示的波束产生单元阵列的截面示意图。FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 16 .
图18是本申请实施例提供的又一种波束产生单元阵列的示意图。FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of another beam generating unit array provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图19是图18所示的波束产生单元阵列的截面示意图。FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 18 .
图20是图18所示的波束产生单元阵列产生的不同波束的波形图。FIG. 20 is a waveform diagram of different beams generated by the beam generating unit array shown in FIG. 18 .
图21至图26是本申请实施例提供的又一些波束产生单元阵列的截面示意图。21 to 26 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of some further beam generating unit arrays provided in embodiments of the present application.
图27至图29是本申请实施例提供的引导面的截面示意图。27 to 29 are schematic cross-sectional views of the guide surface provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图30至图32是本申请实施例提供的引导体的截面示意图。30 to 32 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the guide body provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图33和图34是本申请实施例提供的附加辐射面的截面示意图。33 and 34 are cross-sectional schematic diagrams of the additional radiation surface provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图35为本申请实施例提供的一种超材料截面示意图。FIG35 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a metamaterial provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图36为包含图35所示的超材料的扬声器的截面示意图。FIG. 36 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a loudspeaker including the metamaterial shown in FIG. 35 .
图37为本申请实施例提供的另一种超材料截面示意图。FIG37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another metamaterial provided in an embodiment of the present application.
图38为包含图37所示的超材料的扬声器的截面示意图。FIG. 38 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a loudspeaker including the metamaterial shown in FIG. 37 .
图39是本申请实施例提供的一种发声装置的示意性框图。Figure 39 is a schematic block diagram of a sound-emitting device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面详细描述本申请的实施例,本申请实施例的示例在附图中示出。在附图中,相同或相似的标号表示相同或相似的元件或具有相同或相似功能的元件。下面通过参考附图描述的实施例是示例性的, 仅用于解释本申请,而不能理解为对本申请的限制。The embodiments of the present application are described in detail below, and examples of the embodiments of the present application are shown in the accompanying drawings. In the accompanying drawings, the same or similar reference numerals represent the same or similar elements or elements with the same or similar functions. The embodiments described below with reference to the accompanying drawings are exemplary. It is only used to explain the present application and should not be construed as a limitation of the present application.
本申请中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”等(如果存在)是用于区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样使用的数据在适当情况下可以互换,以便这里描述的本申请的实施例能够以除了在这里图示或描述的那些以外的顺序实施。在本申请实施例中,“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。The terms "first", "second", "third", "fourth", etc. (if any) in this application are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not necessarily used to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the data used in this way can be interchangeable where appropriate, so that the embodiments of the present application described herein can be implemented in an order other than those illustrated or described herein. In the embodiments of the present application, "and/or" is merely an association relationship describing associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist, for example, A and/or B may represent: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" herein generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship.
除非另作定义,本申请使用的技术术语或者科学数据应当为本申请所属技术领域内具有一般技能的人士所理解的通常意义。在本申请的描述中,需要理解的是,术语“中心”、“纵向”、“横向”、“上”、“下”、“前”、“后”、“左”、“右”、“竖直”、“水平”、“顶”、“底”、“内”、“外”等指示的方位或位置关系为基于附图所示的方位或位置关系,仅是为了便于描述本申请和简化描述,而不是指示或按时所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作,因此不能理解为对本申请的限制。Unless otherwise defined, the technical terms or scientific data used in this application shall have the usual meanings understood by persons with ordinary skills in the technical field to which this application belongs. In the description of this application, it should be understood that the terms "center", "longitudinal", "lateral", "upper", "lower", "front", "back", "left", "right", "vertical", "horizontal", "top", "bottom", "inside", "outside" and the like indicate positions or positional relationships based on the positions or positional relationships shown in the accompanying drawings, which are only for the convenience of describing this application and simplifying the description, and do not indicate or indicate that the device or element referred to must have a specific orientation, be constructed and operated in a specific orientation, and therefore cannot be understood as a limitation to this application.
为使本申请解决的技术问题、采用的技术方案和达到的技术效果更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请实施例的技术方案作进一步的详细描述,显然,所描述的实施例仅仅是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。In order to make the technical problems solved by the present application, the technical solutions adopted and the technical effects achieved more clear, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application will be further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. Obviously, the described embodiments are only part of the embodiments of the present application, not all of the embodiments.
在介绍本申请实施例之前,首先简单介绍一下扬声器的发声原理等与本申请相关的技术内容。Before introducing the embodiments of the present application, we will first briefly introduce the sound-generating principle of the speaker and other technical contents related to the present application.
声源的振动可以产生声波,当声波的频率和强度达到特定的范围时,才能够引起动物的听觉。人耳能够感受到的振动频率范围约为20Hz~20kHz,强度范围为0.00002Pa~100Pa,在此频率范围和强度范围内的声波可以称为可听声。其中,一般将频率介于20Hz到500Hz的声波称为低频声音,将频率介于500Hz到2000Hz之间的声波称为中频声音,将频率高于2000Hz低于16kHz的声波称为高频声音。The vibration of the sound source can generate sound waves. When the frequency and intensity of the sound waves reach a specific range, they can cause the hearing of animals. The vibration frequency range that the human ear can feel is about 20Hz~20kHz, and the intensity range is 0.00002Pa~100Pa. Sound waves within this frequency range and intensity range can be called audible sound. Among them, sound waves with frequencies between 20Hz and 500Hz are generally called low-frequency sounds, sound waves with frequencies between 500Hz and 2000Hz are called medium-frequency sounds, and sound waves with frequencies above 2000Hz and below 16kHz are called high-frequency sounds.
声压级(sound pressure level,SPL)是指以对数尺衡量的“有效声压”,相对于一个基准值的大小,用分贝(dB)作为单位。对于人类的听觉,于最敏感的频率范围2000Hz到5000Hz中,听阈(人或动物的耳朵在特定的环境中,能够感觉到的声音的最小声压或声强)约为0.00002Pa,因此通常以此作为声压级的基准值。Sound pressure level (SPL) refers to the "effective sound pressure" measured on a logarithmic scale, relative to a reference value, with decibels (dB) as the unit. For human hearing, in the most sensitive frequency range of 2000Hz to 5000Hz, the hearing threshold (the minimum sound pressure or sound intensity that a human or animal ear can feel in a specific environment) is about 0.00002Pa, so this is usually used as the reference value of the sound pressure level.
传统扬声器振膜产生的声压可以表示为P∝S·A,其中S为振膜表面积,A为振膜的加速度。也就是说,声压P正比于振膜表面积S与振膜的加速度A的乘积。振膜的加速度A和振膜的位移D之间的关系可以表示为A∝f2·D,其中f为声波的角频率。因而,声压P又可以表示为P∝f2·S·D,其中S·D可以表示扬声器振膜振动所引起的空气推动量V,进一步地,声压P又可以表示为P∝f2·V,也就是说,声压P正比于声波的角频率f的平方和空气推动量V的乘积。或者,声压P与声波的能量成正相关。The sound pressure generated by the diaphragm of a traditional speaker can be expressed as P∝S·A, where S is the surface area of the diaphragm and A is the acceleration of the diaphragm. In other words, the sound pressure P is proportional to the product of the surface area S of the diaphragm and the acceleration A of the diaphragm. The relationship between the acceleration A of the diaphragm and the displacement D of the diaphragm can be expressed as A∝f2·D, where f is the angular frequency of the sound wave. Therefore, the sound pressure P can be expressed as P∝f2·S·D, where S·D can represent the air displacement V caused by the vibration of the speaker diaphragm. Further, the sound pressure P can be expressed as P∝f2·V, that is, the sound pressure P is proportional to the product of the square of the angular frequency f of the sound wave and the air displacement V. Alternatively, the sound pressure P is positively correlated with the energy of the sound wave.
输入至扬声器的能量能够更多地转换扬声器输出的可以为人耳感知的可听声的能量,或者说,能够透过扬声器并输出的声压越大(声压的透过率越大),则扬声器的能量转化率越高。对于频率较低的可听声,其对应的声压更高,扬声器的低频的表现能力更强。The energy input to the speaker can be converted more into the energy of the audible sound output by the speaker that can be perceived by the human ear. In other words, the greater the sound pressure that can pass through the speaker and output (the greater the sound pressure transmittance), the higher the energy conversion rate of the speaker. For audible sounds with lower frequencies, the corresponding sound pressure is higher, and the speaker has a stronger ability to express low frequencies.
扬声器(loudspeaker),也称喇叭、音箱、扩音器,是将电子信号转换为声音的换能器、电子元件。A loudspeaker, also known as a horn, speaker, or amplifier, is a transducer or electronic component that converts electronic signals into sound.
调制(modulation),是一种将一个或多个周期性的载波混入想发送的信号的技术,根据调制信号的不同,可以区分为数字调制和模拟调制。调制可以改变信号的幅值大小、频谱成分等,,从而有利于信号的传送。Modulation is a technique that mixes one or more periodic carrier waves into the signal to be sent. Depending on the modulated signal, it can be divided into digital modulation and analog modulation. Modulation can change the amplitude and spectrum components of the signal, which is beneficial to the transmission of the signal.
机械波:机械振动在空间中传播的一种现象,属于波的一种。Mechanical wave: A phenomenon in which mechanical vibration propagates in space, which is a type of wave.
声波:是一种在介质中传播的能量,通过绝热过程增压与减压。用于描述声波的重要物理量有声压、粒子速度、粒子位移和音强。声波属于一种机械波。在本文件中,声波可以包括超声波和/或可听声波、次声波等等。Sound waves: are a type of energy that propagates in a medium, increasing and decreasing pressure through adiabatic processes. The important physical quantities used to describe sound waves are sound pressure, particle velocity, particle displacement, and sound intensity. Sound waves are a type of mechanical wave. In this document, sound waves may include ultrasonic and/or audible sound waves, infrasound waves, etc.
脉冲波:或称为脉波或脉冲,可以用于指一种信号特性(如相位、频率)快速变化的波束,信号特性由基准值变为较高或较低的值,之后又快速的回到基准值。Pulse wave: also known as pulse wave or pulse, can be used to refer to a beam with rapidly changing signal characteristics (such as phase, frequency), the signal characteristics change from a baseline value to a higher or lower value, and then quickly return to the baseline value.
超材料:指一类具有特殊性质的人造材料,该材料的特性源于其精密的几何结构以及尺寸大小,其中的微结构、大小尺度小于它作用的声波的波长,因此得以对波施加影响。 Metamaterials: A class of artificial materials with special properties. The characteristics of this material come from its precise geometric structure and size. The microstructure and size scale of the material are smaller than the wavelength of the sound waves it acts on, so it can exert an influence on the waves.
本申请实施例提供一种扬声器以及一种应用该扬声器的电子设备,该电子设备可以为手机、平板电脑、助听器、智能穿戴设备等需要通过扬声器输出音频的电子设备。智能穿戴设备可以是智能手表、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)眼镜、AR头盔或虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)眼镜等。该扬声器还可以应用于全屋、智能家居、汽车等领域中,用作音频设备或音频设备中的一部分。The embodiment of the present application provides a speaker and an electronic device using the speaker, and the electronic device can be a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a hearing aid, a smart wearable device, or other electronic device that needs to output audio through a speaker. The smart wearable device can be a smart watch, augmented reality (AR) glasses, an AR helmet, or virtual reality (VR) glasses. The speaker can also be used in the fields of whole house, smart home, car, etc., as an audio device or a part of an audio device.
在一些示例中,如图1所示,扬声器100A可以作为可穿戴设备(例如耳机1000)的发声器件。音箱2000可以包含一个或多个扬声器100B,该一个或多个扬声器1000B可以组成音箱2000的发声模组。扬声器100C也可以作为终端设备(例如平板电脑3000)的一个发声器件并装配于平板电脑3000的内部。In some examples, as shown in FIG1 , the speaker 100A can be used as a sound-generating device of a wearable device (e.g., earphone 1000). The speaker 2000 can include one or more speakers 100B, which can constitute a sound module of the speaker 2000. The speaker 100C can also be used as a sound-generating device of a terminal device (e.g., tablet computer 3000) and installed inside the tablet computer 3000.
以下结合扬声器100的物理结构说明本申请提供的扬声器100输出可听声的过程。The process of outputting audible sound by the speaker 100 provided in the present application is described below in conjunction with the physical structure of the speaker 100 .
图2至图5为扬声器100的等轴视图,扬声器100可以包括壳体110、阀门120和一个或多个波束产生模组140,在一些实施例中,扬声器100还可以包括引导结构130。其中壳体110可以包括侧壁111和底部112,阀门120可以位于侧壁111的第一端,底部112可以位于侧壁111的第二端,第一端和第二端为侧壁111上相对的两端。壳体110与阀门120可以围成容纳腔150,该容纳腔150可以用于容纳上述引导结构130和波束产生模组140等。或者,扬声器100可以视为盒体结构,盒体结构的腔体内容置有前述的引导结构130、波束产生模组140等器件,在一些实施例中,这些器件可以靠近盒体结构的盒底设置,盒体结构的远离盒底的一端设置开口,开口位置附近设置有阀门120。FIG. 2 to FIG. 5 are isometric views of a speaker 100. The speaker 100 may include a housing 110, a valve 120, and one or more beam generating modules 140. In some embodiments, the speaker 100 may further include a guide structure 130. The housing 110 may include a side wall 111 and a bottom 112. The valve 120 may be located at a first end of the side wall 111, and the bottom 112 may be located at a second end of the side wall 111. The first end and the second end are two opposite ends on the side wall 111. The housing 110 and the valve 120 may enclose a receiving cavity 150, and the receiving cavity 150 may be used to receive the aforementioned guide structure 130 and the beam generating module 140. Alternatively, the speaker 100 may be regarded as a box structure, and the aforementioned guide structure 130, the beam generating module 140 and other devices are placed in the cavity of the box structure. In some embodiments, these devices may be arranged near the bottom of the box structure, and an opening is arranged at one end of the box structure away from the bottom of the box structure, and the valve 120 is arranged near the opening.
波束产生模组140可以靠近壳体110的底部112设置,波束产生模组140可以用于产生第一波束,该第一波束可以由多个子波束组成。该第一波束可以为机械波,例如超声波,可听声波。。第一波束又可以称为第一声波。第一波束还可以称为初始波束。在一些实施例中,波束产生模组140可以为换能器,换能器可以将电信号转化为振动信号,从而形成第一波束。第一波束在腔体150内传播,当传播至阀门120处时,通过控制阀门120的开关频率,使至少部分的第一波束传播至腔体150外,从而对第一波束进行调制,传播至腔体150外的第一波束为第二波束,第二波束又可以称为第二声波。当阀门120打开时,第一波束可以传播至腔体150外;当阀门120关闭时,第一波束不会传播至腔体150外。The beam generating module 140 may be disposed near the bottom 112 of the housing 110. The beam generating module 140 may be used to generate a first beam, which may be composed of a plurality of sub-beams. The first beam may be a mechanical wave, such as an ultrasonic wave or an audible sound wave. The first beam may also be referred to as a first sound wave. The first beam may also be referred to as an initial beam. In some embodiments, the beam generating module 140 may be a transducer, which may convert an electrical signal into a vibration signal, thereby forming a first beam. The first beam propagates in the cavity 150. When the first beam propagates to the valve 120, at least part of the first beam propagates to the outside of the cavity 150 by controlling the switching frequency of the valve 120, thereby modulating the first beam. The first beam propagated to the outside of the cavity 150 is the second beam, which may also be referred to as a second sound wave. When the valve 120 is opened, the first beam may propagate to the outside of the cavity 150; when the valve 120 is closed, the first beam will not propagate to the outside of the cavity 150.
波束产生模组140也可以设置在腔体150的中部,或者说,波束产生模组140可以将腔体150分割为两个子腔体,两个子腔体中的一个位于波束产生模组140和阀门120之间,两个子腔体中的另一个位于波束产生模组140和壳体110的底部112之间。为便于说明,以下实施例中,以波束产生模组140靠近壳体110的底部112设置为例进行介绍,对于波束产生模组140位于腔体150的中部的情况可以参照下述实施例的相关内容。应理解,以下实施例中以波束产生模组140靠近壳体110的底部112设置为例不应构成对本申请技术方案的限制。The beam generating module 140 may also be arranged in the middle of the cavity 150, or in other words, the beam generating module 140 may divide the cavity 150 into two sub-cavities, one of the two sub-cavities is located between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120, and the other of the two sub-cavities is located between the beam generating module 140 and the bottom 112 of the housing 110. For ease of explanation, in the following embodiments, the beam generating module 140 is arranged close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110 as an example for introduction, and for the case where the beam generating module 140 is located in the middle of the cavity 150, reference may be made to the relevant contents of the following embodiments. It should be understood that the following embodiments take the beam generating module 140 being arranged close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110 as an example and should not constitute a limitation on the technical solution of the present application.
在一些实施例中,波束产生模组140可以包括多个波束产生单元,每个波束产生单元都可以用于产生第一波束的子波束,不同子波束的频率、振幅等性质可以相同或不同。可以通过调整多个波束产生单元的大小和形状来对波束产生单元产生的子波束的频率、振幅等性质进行调整。例如,增大波束产生单元的大小,以使其可以设置更大面积的振膜,从而可以产生振幅更大的第一波束的子波束。In some embodiments, the beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, each of which may be used to generate a sub-beam of the first beam, and the frequency, amplitude and other properties of different sub-beams may be the same or different. The frequency, amplitude and other properties of the sub-beams generated by the beam generating units may be adjusted by adjusting the size and shape of the plurality of beam generating units. For example, the size of the beam generating unit may be increased so that a diaphragm with a larger area may be provided, thereby generating a sub-beam of the first beam with a larger amplitude.
在一种可能的实现方式中,多个波束产生单元的形状、大小、材质等特征可以相同,这样,多个波束产生单元产生的子波束的频率、振幅等性质可以相同或相似,用于调制包含多个子波束的第一波束的调制方式可以更加简单。In one possible implementation, the shapes, sizes, materials and other features of the multiple beam generating units may be the same, so that the frequencies, amplitudes and other properties of the sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units may be the same or similar, and the modulation method for modulating the first beam containing the multiple sub-beams may be simpler.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,多个波束产生单元的形状、大小、材质等特征可以不相同,例如,对于扬声器100内不同位置的波束产生单元,可以设置不同大小的振膜,从而使得不同位置的波束产生单元产生不同的子波束,不同子波束组成的第一波束不同,第一波束在调制后产生的第二波束也会产生差异。也即,可以通过设置不同波束产生单元的形状、大小等性质来实现对扬声器100输出的第二波束的调整。In another possible implementation, the shapes, sizes, materials and other features of the multiple beam generating units may be different. For example, for the beam generating units at different positions in the speaker 100, diaphragms of different sizes may be set, so that the beam generating units at different positions generate different sub-beams, and the first beams composed of different sub-beams are different, and the second beams generated by the first beam after modulation will also be different. That is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted by setting the shapes, sizes and other properties of different beam generating units.
与前文中波束产生模组140产生的第一波束相比,该第二波束的频率可以低于第一波束的频率,从而在对第一波束调制后可以使得第二波束落入可听声的频率范围内。Compared with the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 in the foregoing text, the frequency of the second beam may be lower than the frequency of the first beam, so that after the first beam is modulated, the second beam may fall within the frequency range of audible sound.
在一种可能的实现方式中,多个波束产生单元可以在与壳体110的底部所在平面平行的第一平面上均匀排布,即相邻两个波束产生单元之间的间隔相同。In a possible implementation, the plurality of beam generating units may be evenly arranged on a first plane parallel to the plane where the bottom of the housing 110 is located, that is, the intervals between two adjacent beam generating units are the same.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,多个波束产生单元可以在壳体110的底部所在平面平行的第一平面 上非均匀排布,相邻两个波束产生单元之间的间隔可以不同。In another possible implementation, the plurality of beam generating units may be arranged on a first plane parallel to the plane where the bottom of the housing 110 is located. The beam generating units are arranged non-uniformly, and the intervals between two adjacent beam generating units can be different.
多个波束产生单元的排布方式不同,多个波束产生单元产生的子波束组成的第一波束的性质也会产生差异,从而由第一波束调制后形成的第二波束,即扬声器100输出的第二波束也会产生差异。The arrangement of the multiple beam generating units is different, and the properties of the first beam composed of the sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units will also be different, so the second beam formed by modulating the first beam, that is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 will also be different.
在一些示例中,参见下文中的图11,波束产生模组140可以包括振膜141,该振膜141所在平面可以视为波束产生模组140的辐射面。该振膜141可以为压电薄膜,当对该振膜141施加电压时,该振膜141可以产生形变,例如,振膜141可以在与振膜141垂直的方向上产生形变,当振膜141在与振膜141垂直的方向上向上产生形变,从而推动振膜141上方的空气振膜向上振动,当振膜141在与振膜141垂直的方向上向下产生形变,从而推动振膜141上方的空气振膜向下振动。振膜141在形变零点和形变最大点之间来回往复的形变可以带动振膜141附近的气体产生振动,即振膜141推动气体使其振动沿着一定的方向传播,即形成第一波束。In some examples, see FIG. 11 below, the beam generating module 140 may include a diaphragm 141, and the plane where the diaphragm 141 is located may be regarded as the radiation surface of the beam generating module 140. The diaphragm 141 may be a piezoelectric film, and when a voltage is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may be deformed, for example, the diaphragm 141 may be deformed in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, when the diaphragm 141 is deformed upward in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, the air diaphragm above the diaphragm 141 is pushed to vibrate upward, and when the diaphragm 141 is deformed downward in a direction perpendicular to the diaphragm 141, the air diaphragm above the diaphragm 141 is pushed to vibrate downward. The reciprocating deformation of the diaphragm 141 between the zero point of deformation and the maximum point of deformation may drive the gas near the diaphragm 141 to vibrate, that is, the diaphragm 141 pushes the gas to propagate its vibration along a certain direction, that is, forming a first beam.
这里需要说明的是,当波束产生模组140包括多个波束产生单元时,振膜141可以指每一个波束产生单元上的振膜141。多个波束产生单元的振膜141的大小可以根据波束产生单元的大小来设置,更大的波束产生单元可以设置有更大面积的振膜141。振膜141可以与扬声器100的底部112所在平面平行,也可以与底部112所在平面形成一定的夹角。不同波束产生单元的振膜141与扬声器100的底部112所在平面所成的夹角可以相同,也可以不同。振膜141可以为平面振膜也可以是具有一定弧度的曲面振膜。It should be noted here that when the beam generating module 140 includes multiple beam generating units, the diaphragm 141 may refer to the diaphragm 141 on each beam generating unit. The size of the diaphragm 141 of the multiple beam generating units can be set according to the size of the beam generating unit, and a larger beam generating unit can be provided with a diaphragm 141 with a larger area. The diaphragm 141 may be parallel to the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located, or it may form a certain angle with the plane where the bottom 112 is located. The angles formed by the diaphragms 141 of different beam generating units and the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located may be the same or different. The diaphragm 141 may be a flat diaphragm or a curved diaphragm with a certain curvature.
振膜141的面积大小可以影响波束产生单元产生的子波束的振幅,振膜141与扬声器100的底部112所成的夹角可以影响子波束传播的方向和传播路径,曲面振膜的设置可以在一定程度上对振膜141不同区域产生的波束进行一定的汇聚。因而,在调整上述振膜141的性质中的一种或多种,都可以对波束产生单元产生的子波束产生影响,进而也会对包含该子波束的第一波束产生影响,最终实现对于扬声器100输出的第二波束的调整。The area of the diaphragm 141 can affect the amplitude of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit, the angle between the diaphragm 141 and the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 can affect the propagation direction and propagation path of the sub-beam, and the setting of the curved diaphragm can converge the beams generated by different areas of the diaphragm 141 to a certain extent. Therefore, adjusting one or more of the properties of the diaphragm 141 can affect the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit, and further affect the first beam containing the sub-beam, and finally achieve adjustment of the second beam output by the speaker 100.
参见图3,引导结构130可以位于容纳腔150内。引导结构130可以用于调整第一波束的传播方向和/或传播路径等。引导结构130可以通过多种不同的物理结构、界面形状等来实现上述功能,这部分内容在下文中详细介绍。3 , the guide structure 130 may be located in the accommodating cavity 150. The guide structure 130 may be used to adjust the propagation direction and/or propagation path of the first beam, etc. The guide structure 130 may achieve the above functions through a variety of different physical structures, interface shapes, etc., which are described in detail below.
引导结构130可以位于波束产生模组140与阀门120之间。引导结构130可以与波束产生单元140之间设置固定连接(例如,下文中图30所示,附加辐射面与波束产生单元的振膜之间设置有连接件),或者,引导结构130也可以与壳体110的侧壁111设置固定连接,或者,引导结构130也可以与阀门120之间设置固定连接。示例性的,引导结构130与壳体110的侧壁111相连,并位于波束产生模组140所在平面的正上方。The guide structure 130 may be located between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120. The guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the beam generating unit 140 (for example, as shown in FIG. 30 below, a connector is provided between the additional radiation surface and the diaphragm of the beam generating unit), or the guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110, or the guide structure 130 may be fixedly connected to the valve 120. Exemplarily, the guide structure 130 is connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110 and is located directly above the plane where the beam generating module 140 is located.
阀门120可以用于对波束产生模组140产生的第一波束进行调制以输出第二波束,或者说,阀门120可以用于改变第一波束的频率、相位等性质以获得第二波束。阀门120可以开设有用于通过第一波束的通道121,该通道121可以为缝隙形成的通道也可以为通孔形成的通道等。阀门120上设置的通道121可以按照一定的方式(例如频率)开启或关闭,从而实现对波束产生模组140产生的波束的调制。示例性的,波束产生模组140发出的第一波束的频率为fq1,阀门120可以按照fq2的频率开启通道121,这样扬声器100输出的第二波束的频率fq3则可以视为fq1和fq2的函数,调整fq2可以改变fq3的值,该过程可以视为阀门120对于第一波束的调制。关于阀门120的调制功能的实现下文中进一步说明,此处不作详细介绍。The valve 120 can be used to modulate the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to output the second beam, or in other words, the valve 120 can be used to change the frequency, phase and other properties of the first beam to obtain the second beam. The valve 120 can be provided with a channel 121 for passing the first beam, and the channel 121 can be a channel formed by a slit or a channel formed by a through hole, etc. The channel 121 provided on the valve 120 can be opened or closed in a certain manner (such as frequency), so as to realize the modulation of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140. Exemplarily, the frequency of the first beam emitted by the beam generating module 140 is fq1, and the valve 120 can open the channel 121 according to the frequency of fq2, so that the frequency fq3 of the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be regarded as a function of fq1 and fq2, and adjusting fq2 can change the value of fq3, and this process can be regarded as the modulation of the first beam by the valve 120. The realization of the modulation function of the valve 120 is further described below, and will not be described in detail here.
前文已经说明声压与波束的角频率的平方和空气推动量的乘积正相关。在此基础上可以认为,声压与波束的能量成正相关。因此,扬声器100通过通道121输出的波束的能量越大,波束的声压越高,相反,扬声器100通过通道121输出的波束的能量越小,波束的声压越低。换句话说,对于相同输入的波束,更多的波束能够透过通道121,则扬声器100输出的声压更高。即,声压在通道121处的透过率越大,扬声器100输出的声压越高。It has been explained above that the sound pressure is positively correlated with the product of the square of the angular frequency of the beam and the amount of air propulsion. On this basis, it can be considered that the sound pressure is positively correlated with the energy of the beam. Therefore, the greater the energy of the beam output by the speaker 100 through the channel 121, the higher the sound pressure of the beam. Conversely, the smaller the energy of the beam output by the speaker 100 through the channel 121, the lower the sound pressure of the beam. In other words, for the same input beam, more beams can pass through the channel 121, and the sound pressure output by the speaker 100 is higher. That is, the greater the transmittance of the sound pressure at the channel 121, the higher the sound pressure output by the speaker 100.
如图5所示,扬声器100可以设置有多个阀门120,波束产生模组140位于扬声器100的容纳腔150中,容纳腔150可以包括第一子腔体150A和第二子腔体150B。波束产生模组140产生的波束既可以通过扬声器100的第一子腔体150A传播至第一阀门120A附近,并通过第一阀门120A上的通道传输至扬声器100的外部空间,形成第三声波。波束产生模组140产生的波束也可以通过扬声器100的第二子腔体150B传播至第二阀门120B附近,并通过第二阀门120B上的通道传输至扬声器100的 外部空间,形成第四声波。As shown in FIG5 , the speaker 100 may be provided with a plurality of valves 120. The beam generating module 140 is located in the accommodating cavity 150 of the speaker 100. The accommodating cavity 150 may include a first sub-cavity 150A and a second sub-cavity 150B. The beam generated by the beam generating module 140 may be propagated through the first sub-cavity 150A of the speaker 100 to the vicinity of the first valve 120A, and transmitted to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel on the first valve 120A to form a third sound wave. The beam generated by the beam generating module 140 may also be propagated through the second sub-cavity 150B of the speaker 100 to the vicinity of the second valve 120B, and transmitted to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel on the second valve 120B to form a third sound wave. External space, forming the fourth sound wave.
在波束产生模组140和第一阀门120A之间,或者在第一子腔体150A的空间内可以设置有第一引导结构。在波束产生模组140和第二阀门120B之间,或者在第二子腔体150B的空间内可以设置有第二引导结构。第一引导结构130A和第二引导结构130B中的一个或多个可以用于对波束产生模组140产生的波束的传播路径进行调整。A first guide structure may be provided between the beam generating module 140 and the first valve 120A, or in the space of the first sub-cavity 150A. A second guide structure may be provided between the beam generating module 140 and the second valve 120B, or in the space of the second sub-cavity 150B. One or more of the first guide structure 130A and the second guide structure 130B may be used to adjust the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140.
在一些实施例中,第一阀门120A可以对波束产生模组140产生的第八子声波142A进行调制,形成第三声波;第二阀门120B可以对波束产生模组140产生的第九子声波142B进行调制,形成第四声波。第一阀门120A对第八子声波142A调制的方式可以与第二阀门120B对第九子声波142B调制的方式相同或者不同。在两种调制方式相同的情况下,由第一阀门120A输出的波束的性质(例如频率或振幅等)可以与由第二阀门120B输出的波束的性质(例如频率或振幅等)相同或者相似,这样,扬声器100可以通过同一个波束产生模组140向空间中的不同方向输出相似的波束,有利于提高扬声器100的能量转换效率,有利于提高扬声器100输出可听声的效果。In some embodiments, the first valve 120A can modulate the eighth sub-sound wave 142A generated by the beam generating module 140 to form a third sound wave; the second valve 120B can modulate the ninth sub-sound wave 142B generated by the beam generating module 140 to form a fourth sound wave. The way in which the first valve 120A modulates the eighth sub-sound wave 142A can be the same as or different from the way in which the second valve 120B modulates the ninth sub-sound wave 142B. When the two modulation methods are the same, the properties of the beam output by the first valve 120A (such as frequency or amplitude, etc.) can be the same or similar to the properties of the beam output by the second valve 120B (such as frequency or amplitude, etc.). In this way, the speaker 100 can output similar beams to different directions in space through the same beam generating module 140, which is beneficial to improving the energy conversion efficiency of the speaker 100 and improving the effect of the speaker 100 outputting audible sound.
在两种调制方式不同的情况下,可以通过第一阀门120A和第二阀门120B对于第八子声波142A和第九子声波142B的差异化调制,使得扬声器100可以输出不同频率或振幅的波束,两种波束在频率上可以实现互补,以提升扬声器100输出可听声的效果。在一种可能的实现方式中,第一阀门120A和第二阀门120B对第八子声波142A和第九子声波142B的调制方式不同,扬声器100在同时输出第八子声波142A和第九子声波142B的情况下,第八子声波142A和第九子声波142B可以在空间中的第一位置发生相互抵消,在空间中的第二位置发生相互增强,从而使得扬声器100在空间上的音频分布实现差异化效果。In the case where the two modulation modes are different, the first valve 120A and the second valve 120B can perform differential modulation on the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B, so that the speaker 100 can output beams of different frequencies or amplitudes, and the two beams can complement each other in frequency to enhance the effect of the speaker 100 outputting audible sound. In a possible implementation, the first valve 120A and the second valve 120B have different modulation modes on the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B. When the speaker 100 outputs the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B at the same time, the eighth sub-sound wave 142A and the ninth sub-sound wave 142B can cancel each other out at a first position in the space and enhance each other at a second position in the space, so that the speaker 100 achieves a differentiated effect in the audio distribution in space.
图6至图8示例性的示出了本申请实施例提供的3种可能的阀门120的结构。6 to 8 exemplarily show three possible structures of the valve 120 provided in the embodiments of the present application.
图6为一种扬声器100的俯视图,阀门120可以包括第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123可以分别与壳体110的侧壁111连接。在一些实施例中,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123处于同一平面内,在一些实施例中,第一子阀门122与第二子阀门123的大小相等和/或形状还可以相同。示例性的,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123关于阀门120所在的平面的对称轴OO′对称。FIG6 is a top view of a speaker 100. The valve 120 may include a first sub-valve 122 and a second sub-valve 123. The first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110, respectively. In some embodiments, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are located in the same plane. In some embodiments, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are equal in size and/or have the same shape. Exemplarily, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are symmetrical about the symmetry axis OO′ of the plane where the valve 120 is located.
阀门120还包括通道121,该通道121位于第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123之间,该通道121为缝隙状或长条状,通道121在宽度方向上(X轴方向)也可以关于对称轴OO′对称。通道121的宽度或者说缝隙121的宽度与第一子阀门122的属性、第二子阀门123的属性、波束产生模组140的属性等多个因素中的一个或多个有关。The valve 120 further includes a channel 121, which is located between the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123. The channel 121 is in the shape of a slit or a strip, and the channel 121 can also be symmetrical about the symmetry axis OO' in the width direction (X-axis direction). The width of the channel 121 or the width of the slit 121 is related to one or more of a plurality of factors such as the properties of the first sub-valve 122, the properties of the second sub-valve 123, and the properties of the beam generating module 140.
图6中所示的关于对称轴OO′对称的阀门120可以称为对称阀门。对于第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123不关于对称轴OO′对称或者通道121不关于对称轴OO′对称的阀门120,可以称为非对称阀门。对于非对称阀门,在波束产生模组140包含多个波束产生单元的情况下,多个波束产生单元产生到达通道121的传播路径可以均不相同,扬声器100内部通道121处附近的声压可以由更多种不同的子波束对应的声压复合而成,这样调整多个波束产生单元中的任一个都可以对扬声器100输出的第二波束产生不同的影响,有利于扩大扬声器100输出第二波束的可调整的空间,有利于提高扬声器100输出的可听声的质量。The valve 120 shown in FIG6 , which is symmetrical about the axis of symmetry OO′, can be called a symmetrical valve. The valve 120 in which the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are not symmetrical about the axis of symmetry OO′ or the channel 121 is not symmetrical about the axis of symmetry OO′, can be called an asymmetrical valve. For an asymmetrical valve, when the beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units, the propagation paths generated by the plurality of beam generating units to reach the channel 121 can be different, and the sound pressure near the channel 121 inside the speaker 100 can be compounded by the sound pressures corresponding to more different sub-beams, so that adjusting any one of the plurality of beam generating units can have different effects on the second beam output by the speaker 100, which is beneficial to expand the adjustable space for the second beam output by the speaker 100, and is beneficial to improve the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
图7为扬声器100的剖面图,图7示出了另一种非对称阀门120的结构。在一些实施例中,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123在壳体110的高度方向(Z轴方向)上的高度不同。或者说,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123不处于同一平面(XY平面)内。或者说,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123距离扬声器100的底部112(或波束产生模组140)的距离不同。在一些实施例中,第一子阀门122距离扬声器100的底部112的距离和第二子阀门123距离扬声器100的底部112的距离的差值可以根据阀门120的制备材料确定,例如,两者的差值可以为阀门120制备材料的最大形变量的0.2倍~2.0倍。在一些实施例中,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123的大小相等和/或形状相同。第一子阀门122位于远离壳体110的底部112的位置,第二子阀门123位于靠近壳体110底部112的位置。通道121同样处于第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123之间。FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the speaker 100, and FIG. 7 shows another structure of an asymmetric valve 120. In some embodiments, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have different heights in the height direction (Z-axis direction) of the housing 110. In other words, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are not in the same plane (XY plane). In other words, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are at different distances from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 (or the beam generating module 140). In some embodiments, the difference between the distance of the first sub-valve 122 from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 and the distance of the second sub-valve 123 from the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 can be determined according to the material of the valve 120, for example, the difference between the two can be 0.2 to 2.0 times the maximum deformation of the material of the valve 120. In some embodiments, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are equal in size and/or have the same shape. The first sub-valve 122 is located away from the bottom 112 of the housing 110, and the second sub-valve 123 is located close to the bottom 112 of the housing 110. The channel 121 is also located between the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123.
通道221除了如图6和图7所示的缝隙状外,还可以是其他形状,例如圆孔状、“井”状,或者也可以是多种形状的组合(例如,缝隙状与圆孔状的组合)等。图8为另一种扬声器100的俯视图, 图8示出了另一种非对称阀门120的结构。该阀门120开设有圆形的通道121,通道121的几何中心A与阀门120的几何中心B不重合。改变非对称阀门形状或者改变阀门上开设通道的位置和/或形状,可以改变波束产生模组140产生的波束传播至通道121的传播路径,有利于实现对于扬声器100输出第二波束的调整。In addition to the slit shape shown in FIG6 and FIG7 , the channel 221 may also be in other shapes, such as a circular hole shape, a "well" shape, or a combination of multiple shapes (for example, a combination of a slit shape and a circular hole shape). FIG8 is a top view of another speaker 100. FIG8 shows another structure of an asymmetric valve 120. The valve 120 is provided with a circular channel 121, and the geometric center A of the channel 121 does not coincide with the geometric center B of the valve 120. Changing the shape of the asymmetric valve or changing the position and/or shape of the channel provided on the valve can change the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the channel 121, which is conducive to adjusting the second beam output by the speaker 100.
当阀门120上设置的通道121开启时,波束产生模组140产生的波束可以通过该通道121传播至扬声器100的外部空间,当通道121关闭时,波束产生模组140产生的波束难以通过通道121传播至扬声器100的外部空间。换句话说,当通道121开启时,波束产生模组140产生的波束的声压在阀门120附近的透射率较高,当通道121关闭时,波束产生模组140产生的波束的声压在阀门120附近的透射率较低。When the channel 121 provided on the valve 120 is opened, the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 can be propagated to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel 121, and when the channel 121 is closed, the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 is difficult to propagate to the external space of the speaker 100 through the channel 121. In other words, when the channel 121 is opened, the transmittance of the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 near the valve 120 is high, and when the channel 121 is closed, the transmittance of the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 near the valve 120 is low.
在一些示例中,如图9所示,阀门120可以为单孔阀门,阀门120可以包括挡板124,当该挡板124贴附在阀门120内壁开设通道121对应的位置时,或者,当该挡板124盖设在阀门120外壁开设通道121对应的位置时,挡板124可以遮挡阀门120上开设的通道121从而使得通道121关闭。相应的,当挡板124从靠近通道121的位置移开时,通道121开启。In some examples, as shown in FIG. 9 , the valve 120 may be a single-hole valve, and the valve 120 may include a baffle 124. When the baffle 124 is attached to a position corresponding to the channel 121 opened on the inner wall of the valve 120, or when the baffle 124 is covered on a position corresponding to the channel 121 opened on the outer wall of the valve 120, the baffle 124 may block the channel 121 opened on the valve 120, thereby closing the channel 121. Accordingly, when the baffle 124 moves away from a position close to the channel 121, the channel 121 is opened.
一种可能的情况是,扬声器100可以发送控制信号控制挡板124的位移,从而实现对通道121开启和关闭的控制。例如,挡板124可以与电子驱动器连接,控制信号可以用于控制电子驱动器的运行和停止,当电子驱动器运行时,电子驱动器可以推动挡板124移动沿P1P2或P3P4方向上移动,以使得挡板124贴附或者盖设在通道121上。挡板124还可以与弹簧连接,当电子驱动器停止时,与挡板124连接的弹簧可以在恢复形变的过程中将挡板124从通道121上移开。In one possible case, the speaker 100 may send a control signal to control the displacement of the baffle 124, thereby realizing the control of opening and closing the channel 121. For example, the baffle 124 may be connected to an electronic driver, and the control signal may be used to control the operation and stop of the electronic driver. When the electronic driver is running, the electronic driver may push the baffle 124 to move along the P1P2 or P3P4 direction, so that the baffle 124 is attached to or covers the channel 121. The baffle 124 may also be connected to a spring. When the electronic driver stops, the spring connected to the baffle 124 may move the baffle 124 away from the channel 121 during the process of restoring the deformation.
在另一些示例中,阀门120可以为压电材料,当为压电材料施加电压时,压电材料可以在材料所在平面的方向、与材料所在平面垂直的方向或者其他方向上产生形变。通过对阀门120施加电压以使得阀门120伸长或者缩短从而实现阀门120上开设的通道221的关闭或者开启。In other examples, the valve 120 may be a piezoelectric material. When a voltage is applied to the piezoelectric material, the piezoelectric material may deform in the direction of the plane where the material is located, in a direction perpendicular to the plane where the material is located, or in other directions. By applying a voltage to the valve 120 to extend or shorten the valve 120, the channel 221 opened on the valve 120 is closed or opened.
例如,如图10所示的第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123可以为压电材料,控制通道开启或者关闭的控制信号可以为施加在第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123上的电压信号。当电压施加在第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123上时,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123可以发生形变。示例性的,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123的形变方向可以为靠近通道121的方向或者图10中沿P5P6的方向。在t1时刻,通道121为开启状态。在t1时刻到t2时刻之间,扬声器100持续对第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123施加电压信号,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123处于持续的伸长的状态,通道121的宽度逐渐收窄。在t2时刻,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123相对的两端相互抵接,通道121关闭。当对第一子阀门122和/或第二子阀门123施加相反方向的电压时,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123的形变方向为远离通道121的方向,通道121的宽度变宽直至完全开启。For example, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 shown in FIG10 may be piezoelectric materials, and the control signal for controlling the opening or closing of the channel may be a voltage signal applied to the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123. When the voltage is applied to the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123, the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be deformed. Exemplarily, the deformation direction of the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 may be a direction close to the channel 121 or a direction along P5P6 in FIG10. At time t1, the channel 121 is in an open state. Between time t1 and time t2, the speaker 100 continuously applies a voltage signal to the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123, and the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are in a state of continuous extension, and the width of the channel 121 gradually narrows. At time t2, the opposite ends of the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 abut against each other, and the channel 121 is closed. When voltages in opposite directions are applied to the first sub-valve 122 and/or the second sub-valve 123 , the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 are deformed in a direction away from the channel 121 , and the width of the channel 121 widens until it is fully opened.
不同类型的阀门可以用于对不同类型的第一波束进行调制,阀门还可以与扬声器内的其他功能模块相配合,例如扬声器100的腔体结构,以实现提高扬声器输出目标声波的声压的目的。Different types of valves can be used to modulate different types of first beams, and the valves can also cooperate with other functional modules in the speaker, such as the cavity structure of the speaker 100, to achieve the purpose of increasing the sound pressure of the target sound waves output by the speaker.
图6至图10仅示例性的提供了一些阀门120可能的结构,本领域技术人员还可以根据这些示例归纳、推导出其他变形的阀门120的结构,应理解,这一部分内容也应落入本申请的范围内。6 to 10 only provide some possible structures of the valve 120 by way of example. Those skilled in the art can also summarize and deduce other modified structures of the valve 120 based on these examples. It should be understood that this part of the content should also fall within the scope of the present application.
对于对称阀门和非对称阀门均可以用于对波束产生模组140产生的不同波束进行调制,以下进一步介绍本申请实施例提供的波束产生模组140。Both symmetric valves and asymmetric valves can be used to modulate different beams generated by the beam generating module 140. The beam generating module 140 provided in the embodiment of the present application is further described below.
波束产生模组140可以包括一个或多个波束产生单元,在该波束产生模组140仅包含一个波束产生单元的情况下,该波束产生模组140也可以称为波束产生单元140。The beam generating module 140 may include one or more beam generating units. When the beam generating module 140 includes only one beam generating unit, the beam generating module 140 may also be referred to as a beam generating unit 140 .
波束产生模组140可以包括振膜141,振膜141的振动可以通过多种方式实现。一种可能的情况是,振膜141可以是压电材料,当对振膜141施加电信号时,振膜141可以根据施加的电信号的不同产生不同的形变,从而使得空气产生相应的振动形成波束。另一种可能的情况是,振膜141可以为磁致伸缩材料,当对振膜141施加电磁信号时,振膜141可以根据施加的电磁信号的不同产生不同的形变,从而使空气产生相应的振动形成波束。又一种可能情况是,波束产生模组140还可以包括动圈,波束产生模组140可以控制动圈振动,动圈通过空气传动带动振膜141振动,从而形成波束。The beam generating module 140 may include a diaphragm 141, and the vibration of the diaphragm 141 may be achieved in a variety of ways. One possible scenario is that the diaphragm 141 may be a piezoelectric material, and when an electric signal is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may produce different deformations according to the applied electric signal, thereby causing the air to vibrate accordingly to form a beam. Another possible scenario is that the diaphragm 141 may be a magnetostrictive material, and when an electromagnetic signal is applied to the diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may produce different deformations according to the applied electromagnetic signal, thereby causing the air to vibrate accordingly to form a beam. Another possible scenario is that the beam generating module 140 may also include a moving coil, and the beam generating module 140 may control the vibration of the moving coil, and the moving coil drives the diaphragm 141 to vibrate through air transmission, thereby forming a beam.
图11所示为波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,该波束产生模组140包括振膜141和盒体143,盒体143的一面开口,振膜141盖设在该开口上,盒体143内部为背腔144。以振膜141的中心点U为例,该振膜141的中心点U可以在控制信号的作用下在形变零点(点P8)的上下来回往复运动。具体 的,在接收到信号1时,振膜141的中心点U可以从初始位置(形变零点或点P8)往P7点(或正向形变最大点)运动,当振膜141接收空信号时,振膜141可以恢复形变,即点U可以从P7点返回P8点。在接收到信号2时,振膜141的中心点U可以从初始位置(形变零点或点P8)往P9点(或反向形变最大点)运动,当振膜141接收空信号时,振膜141可以恢复形变,即点U可以从P9点返回P8点。振膜141上的质点在正向形变最大点、形变零点和反向形变的最大点之间来回往复的运动,可以带动振膜141周围的空气振动,从而产生波束。FIG11 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a beam generating module 140, which includes a diaphragm 141 and a box body 143. One side of the box body 143 is open, and the diaphragm 141 covers the opening. The interior of the box body 143 is a back cavity 144. Taking the center point U of the diaphragm 141 as an example, the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can reciprocate up and down the deformation zero point (point P8) under the action of the control signal. When signal 1 is received, the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can move from the initial position (deformation zero point or point P8) to point P7 (or the point of maximum positive deformation). When the diaphragm 141 receives an empty signal, the diaphragm 141 can restore the deformation, that is, point U can return from point P7 to point P8. When signal 2 is received, the center point U of the diaphragm 141 can move from the initial position (deformation zero point or point P8) to point P9 (or the point of maximum reverse deformation). When the diaphragm 141 receives an empty signal, the diaphragm 141 can restore the deformation, that is, point U can return from point P9 to point P8. The reciprocating movement of the particles on the diaphragm 141 between the point of maximum positive deformation, the point of deformation zero, and the point of maximum reverse deformation can drive the air around the diaphragm 141 to vibrate, thereby generating a beam.
这里,当波束产生模组140中包含多个波束产生单元时,该多个波束产生单元可以均包括振膜141和盒体143。当波束产生模组140仅包含一个波束产生单元,或者说,该波束产生模组140仅包含一个振膜141时,该振膜141可以与扬声器100的壳体110的侧壁111连接,或者说,这种情况下,壳体110可以为盒体143。Here, when the beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units, the plurality of beam generating units may each include a diaphragm 141 and a box body 143. When the beam generating module 140 includes only one beam generating unit, or in other words, the beam generating module 140 includes only one diaphragm 141, the diaphragm 141 may be connected to the side wall 111 of the housing 110 of the speaker 100, or in other words, in this case, the housing 110 may be a box body 143.
图12示出了另一波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,该波束产生模组140包括振膜141和支撑板145,支撑板145上设置缺口146,振膜141可以盖设在缺口146上。当振膜141发生变形时,振膜141可以在缺口146的位置附近发生往复运动,从而带动振膜141周围的空气振动以产生波束。在波束产生模组140上设置支撑板145,并通过设置缺口146的形式为振膜141提供变形容纳空间,有利于减少波束产生模组140在扬声器100的容纳腔150空间的占用。FIG12 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which includes a diaphragm 141 and a support plate 145. A notch 146 is provided on the support plate 145, and the diaphragm 141 can be covered on the notch 146. When the diaphragm 141 is deformed, the diaphragm 141 can reciprocate near the position of the notch 146, thereby driving the air around the diaphragm 141 to vibrate to generate a beam. The support plate 145 is provided on the beam generating module 140, and the notch 146 is provided to provide a deformation accommodation space for the diaphragm 141, which is conducive to reducing the space occupied by the beam generating module 140 in the accommodation cavity 150 of the speaker 100.
当波束产生模组140包含多个波束产生单元时,支撑板145上可以设置有多个缺口146,该多个缺口146可以按照阵列的形式分布在支撑板145上,每个波束产生单元均可以包含振膜141,当多个振膜141盖设在多个缺口146上时,可以形成波束产生单元阵列。When the beam generating module 140 includes multiple beam generating units, a plurality of notches 146 may be provided on the support plate 145. The plurality of notches 146 may be distributed on the support plate 145 in the form of an array. Each beam generating unit may include a diaphragm 141. When a plurality of diaphragms 141 are covered on the plurality of notches 146, a beam generating unit array may be formed.
振膜141在往复运动过程中,振膜141的上部空间和下部空间中都会产生波束,上部空间中的波束可以在一定的方向范围内传播,下部空间中的波束也可以在一定的方向范围内传播。如果对上述一定的方向范围内传播的波束进行适当的调制,即可将这些波束转换为人耳可感知到的声音(可听声)。对振膜141产生的波束的进行调制的结构既可以设置在振膜141的上部空间,也可以设置在振膜141的下部空间。示例性的,前文图5所示的扬声器100,扬声器100即可以从第一阀门120A往外部空间输出可听声,也可以从第二阀门120B往外部空间输出可听声。During the reciprocating motion of the diaphragm 141, beams are generated in both the upper space and the lower space of the diaphragm 141. The beams in the upper space can propagate within a certain range of directions, and the beams in the lower space can also propagate within a certain range of directions. If the beams propagating within the above-mentioned certain range of directions are appropriately modulated, these beams can be converted into sounds (audible sounds) perceptible to the human ear. The structure for modulating the beams generated by the diaphragm 141 can be set in the upper space of the diaphragm 141 or in the lower space of the diaphragm 141. For example, the speaker 100 shown in FIG. 5 above can output audible sounds from the first valve 120A to the external space, and can also output audible sounds from the second valve 120B to the external space.
在波束产生模组140包括背腔144的情况下,该背腔144还可以用于收纳前述动圈、以及输出控制振膜振动的控制信号的控制电路,有利于对波束产生模组140的维修和维护。When the beam generating module 140 includes a back cavity 144 , the back cavity 144 can also be used to accommodate the aforementioned dynamic coil and a control circuit that outputs a control signal for controlling the vibration of the diaphragm, which is beneficial for the repair and maintenance of the beam generating module 140 .
振膜141产生的波束既可以是机械波(声波),也可以是脉冲波,例如方波、三角波、锯齿波等。对于不同的波束可以采用不同的调制方法和/或调制结构。The wave beam generated by the diaphragm 141 can be a mechanical wave (sound wave) or a pulse wave, such as a square wave, a triangle wave, a sawtooth wave, etc. Different modulation methods and/or modulation structures can be used for different wave beams.
图13所示为扬声器100的俯视图,图中未示出阀门120和引导结构130。波束产生模组140可以包括多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元可以组成如图13所示的波束产生单元阵列,多个波束产生单元形状相同,面积大小相等,且处于同一平面内。在图13中,以多个波束产生单元均匀排布形成5行6列的波束产生单元阵列为例进行示意,相邻波束产生单元行之间的间距可以均为a,相邻波束产生单元列之间的可以间距均为b。这里,a为大于或者等于零且小于扬声器100的容纳腔150在X轴方向上的尺寸(或称为容纳腔150的宽度)的实数,b为大于或者等于零且小于容纳腔150在Y轴方向上的尺寸(或称为容纳腔150的长度)的实数。具体的a、b值的大小可以根据容纳腔150内容纳的波束产生模组140的尺寸确定,或者根据容纳腔150内包含的波束产生单元的数量和排列方式确定。通过调整a、b值的大小,可以间接地调整了波束产生单元距离通道121的距离,改变了波束产生单元产生的子波束的传播路径,在一定程度上可以实现对于扬声器100输出的第二波束的调整。FIG13 is a top view of the speaker 100, in which the valve 120 and the guide structure 130 are not shown. The beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units may form a beam generating unit array as shown in FIG13, wherein the plurality of beam generating units have the same shape, are equal in area, and are located in the same plane. In FIG13, a beam generating unit array in which a plurality of beam generating units are evenly arranged to form 5 rows and 6 columns is used as an example for illustration, and the spacing between adjacent rows of beam generating units may be a, and the spacing between adjacent columns of beam generating units may be b. Here, a is a real number greater than or equal to zero and less than the size of the accommodating cavity 150 of the speaker 100 in the X-axis direction (or referred to as the width of the accommodating cavity 150), and b is a real number greater than or equal to zero and less than the size of the accommodating cavity 150 in the Y-axis direction (or referred to as the length of the accommodating cavity 150). The specific values of a and b may be determined according to the size of the beam generating module 140 contained in the accommodating cavity 150, or according to the number and arrangement of the beam generating units contained in the accommodating cavity 150. By adjusting the values of a and b, the distance between the beam generating unit and the channel 121 can be indirectly adjusted, and the propagation path of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit can be changed. To a certain extent, the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted.
图14所示为图13中波束产生单元阵列在mm′截面的示意图,以下以波束产生单元140A和波束产生单元140B为例,说明波束在波束产生模组140至通道121之间的传播过程。FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the beam generating unit array in FIG13 at the mm′ section. The following takes the beam generating unit 140A and the beam generating unit 140B as examples to illustrate the propagation process of the beam between the beam generating module 140 and the channel 121.
前文已经说明,同一个波束产生单元可以在其上部空间和/或下部空间的一定范围内产生波束。不同传播方向的波束都有可能传播至通道121,可以理解的是,不同传播方向的波束传播至通道121的传播路径不同。图14中所示为波束产生单元140A的几何中心产生的波束(以下称为波束S1)传播至通道121附近的质点E处的传播路径以及波束产生单元140B的几何中心产生的波束(以下称为波束S2)传播至通道121附近的质点E处的传播路径。As described above, the same beam generating unit can generate beams within a certain range of its upper space and/or lower space. Beams with different propagation directions may propagate to the channel 121. It can be understood that the propagation paths of beams with different propagation directions to the channel 121 are different. FIG14 shows the propagation path of the beam generated by the geometric center of the beam generating unit 140A (hereinafter referred to as beam S1) to the particle E near the channel 121 and the propagation path of the beam generated by the geometric center of the beam generating unit 140B (hereinafter referred to as beam S2) to the particle E near the channel 121.
波束S1传播至通道121的传播路径的长度d1大于波束S2传播至通道121的传播路径的长度d2。结合图15,由于d2的长度较短,d1的长度较长,波束S2传播至质点E所用时长较短,波束S1传播 至质点E所用时长较长。例如,波束S2传播至质点E所用时长可以为1.25T,波束S1传播至质点E所用时长可以为1.5T,其中T为波束S1和波束S2的周期。波束S1和波束S2的初始相位(t=0的相位)相同,1.5T时刻对应波束S1的波形图上的点R1,1.25T时刻对应波束S2的波形图上的点R2,因此,波束S1引起的质点E的振动幅度可以为R1的纵坐标,记为X1,X1=0。波束S2引起质点E的振动幅度可以为R2的纵坐标,记为X2,X2=波束的振幅Am。这样,波束S1和波束S2对于质点E的振动幅度的综合影响可以认为是X1+X2=0+Am。声压的强度大小是由气体分子产生的,质点E的振动幅度越大可以理解为质点E附近的声压越大,在波束都从介质A传播到介质B中的情况下,相应的波束的声压透射率也越大。The length d1 of the propagation path of beam S1 to channel 121 is greater than the length d2 of the propagation path of beam S2 to channel 121. In conjunction with FIG15 , since the length d2 is shorter and the length d1 is longer, the time taken for beam S2 to propagate to particle E is shorter, and beam S1 propagates The time taken to reach particle E is longer. For example, the time taken by beam S2 to propagate to particle E can be 1.25T, and the time taken by beam S1 to propagate to particle E can be 1.5T, where T is the period of beam S1 and beam S2. The initial phases (phase at t=0) of beam S1 and beam S2 are the same, the moment 1.5T corresponds to point R1 on the waveform diagram of beam S1, and the moment 1.25T corresponds to point R2 on the waveform diagram of beam S2. Therefore, the vibration amplitude of particle E caused by beam S1 can be the ordinate of R1, denoted as X1, and X1=0. The vibration amplitude of particle E caused by beam S2 can be the ordinate of R2, denoted as X2, and X2=the amplitude of the beam Am. In this way, the combined influence of beam S1 and beam S2 on the vibration amplitude of particle E can be considered to be X1+X2=0+Am. The intensity of the sound pressure is generated by the gas molecules. The greater the vibration amplitude of particle E, the greater the sound pressure near particle E. When the beam propagates from medium A to medium B, the corresponding sound pressure transmittance of the beam is also greater.
根据上述示例可知,通过波束传播至通道221的路径、波束的初始相位、波束传播速度等中的一种或多种,可以实现波束在通道221附近声压透射率的调整。According to the above examples, the sound pressure transmittance of the beam near the channel 221 can be adjusted by one or more of the path of the beam propagation to the channel 221, the initial phase of the beam, the beam propagation speed, etc.
在一些实施例中,可以通过控制不同波束产生单元产生子波束的时延来实现对不同波束产生单元产生的不同子波束的初始相位的调整。表1示例性的给出了上述波束S1和波束S2的时延。In some embodiments, the initial phases of different sub-beams generated by different beam generating units can be adjusted by controlling the time delays of the sub-beams generated by different beam generating units. Table 1 exemplarily shows the time delays of the above beams S1 and S2.
表1Table 1
在对上述波束S1和波束S2应用表1所示的时延的情况下,在t=0.25T的时刻,波束产生单元140A产生波束S1,在t=0的时刻,波束产生单元140B产生波束S2。波束S2传播至通道121的过程没有发生变化,波束S2对于质点E的振动幅度的影响仍为X2=Am。波束产生单元140A产生波束S1′,波束S1′传播至质点E仍需要1.5T,在这种情况下,波束S1′传播1.5T后对应的是波形图上的R1′,波束S1′引起的质点E的振动幅度可以为R1′的纵坐标,记为X1′,X1′=Am。When the time delay shown in Table 1 is applied to the above-mentioned beam S1 and beam S2, at time t=0.25T, beam generating unit 140A generates beam S1, and at time t=0, beam generating unit 140B generates beam S2. The process of beam S2 propagating to channel 121 has not changed, and the influence of beam S2 on the vibration amplitude of particle E is still X2=Am. Beam generating unit 140A generates beam S1′, and it still takes 1.5T for beam S1′ to propagate to particle E. In this case, after beam S1′ propagates 1.5T, it corresponds to R1′ on the waveform diagram. The vibration amplitude of particle E caused by beam S1′ can be the vertical coordinate of R1′, recorded as X1′, and X1′=Am.
因此,在对波束产生单元140A和波束产生单元140B分别设置不同的时延后,两个波束产生单元对于质点E的振动幅度的影响可以认为是X1+X2=Am+Am,该振动幅度相较于未设置时延前的值得到了明显提升,相应的,波束在通道121附近的声压透射率也得到明显提升。Therefore, after setting different time delays for beam generating unit 140A and beam generating unit 140B respectively, the influence of the two beam generating units on the vibration amplitude of particle E can be considered to be X1+X2=Am+Am. The vibration amplitude is significantly improved compared to the value before the time delay is set. Correspondingly, the sound pressure transmittance of the beam near channel 121 is also significantly improved.
在另一些实施例中,可以通过调整波束产生单元阵列的排布方式来实现对于不同波束产生单元产生的子波束传播至通道121处的传播路径长短的调整,进而改变包含不同子波束的第一波束在通道121附近的声压透射率。In other embodiments, the length of the propagation path of the sub-beams generated by different beam generating units to the channel 121 can be adjusted by adjusting the arrangement of the beam generating unit array, thereby changing the sound pressure transmittance of the first beam containing different sub-beams near the channel 121.
示例性的,在靠近通道121附近的相邻两行或者相邻两列波束产生单元之间的行间距或者列间距较小,在远离通道121附近相邻两行或者相邻两列波束产生单元之间的行间距或者列间距较大。Exemplarily, the row spacing or column spacing between two adjacent rows or columns of beam generating units near the channel 121 is smaller, and the row spacing or column spacing between two adjacent rows or columns of beam generating units far from the channel 121 is larger.
图16为又一扬声器100的俯视图,图16示例性的给出了一种波束产生单元阵列的排布方式。多个波束产生单元可以形成5行6列的波束产生单元阵列。相邻两列的波束产生单元之间的间距为b,相邻两行的波束产生单元之间的行间距不同,第一行波束产生单元与第二行波束产生单元之间的行间距为a2,第二行、第三行和第四行波束产生单元相邻两行的行间距为a1,第四行波束产生单元和第五行波束产生单元之间的行间距为a2,其中,a2大于a1。调整相邻两个波束产生单元之间的间距可以间接地对波束产生单元与通道121的距离进行调整,从而影响调整前后波束产生单元产生的子波束传播至通道121附近的传播路径,有利于实现对于扬声器100输出第二波束的调整。FIG16 is a top view of another loudspeaker 100, and FIG16 exemplarily shows an arrangement of an array of beam generating units. A plurality of beam generating units can form an array of beam generating units with 5 rows and 6 columns. The spacing between two adjacent columns of beam generating units is b, and the row spacing between two adjacent rows of beam generating units is different. The row spacing between the first row of beam generating units and the second row of beam generating units is a2, the row spacing between two adjacent rows of beam generating units in the second row, the third row and the fourth row is a1, and the row spacing between the fourth row of beam generating units and the fifth row of beam generating units is a2, wherein a2 is greater than a1. Adjusting the spacing between two adjacent beam generating units can indirectly adjust the distance between the beam generating unit and the channel 121, thereby affecting the propagation path of the sub-beam generated by the beam generating unit before and after the adjustment to the vicinity of the channel 121, which is conducive to adjusting the second beam output by the loudspeaker 100.
图17为图16所示扬声器100的剖面视图,结合图17,当调整多个波束产生单元的排列方式时,举例而言,波束产生单元140A产生的波束传播至通道121附近的质点E的路径d1的长度会发生变化,相应的波束产生单元140B产生的波束传播至通道121附近的质点E的路径d2的长度也会发生变化。传播路径长短的变化会引起波束到达质点E的所用时间的变化,相应地,就会引起波束对于通道221附近质点振动影响的变化,即达到对于通道221附近声压的调整。FIG17 is a cross-sectional view of the loudspeaker 100 shown in FIG16. In conjunction with FIG17, when the arrangement of the plurality of beam generating units is adjusted, for example, the length of the path d1 of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140A to propagate to the mass point E near the channel 121 will change, and the length of the path d2 of the beam generated by the corresponding beam generating unit 140B to propagate to the mass point E near the channel 121 will also change. The change in the length of the propagation path will cause the change in the time taken by the beam to reach the mass point E, and accordingly, it will cause the change in the influence of the beam on the vibration of the mass point near the channel 221, that is, the adjustment of the sound pressure near the channel 221 is achieved.
在又一些实施例中,可以通过调整波束产生单元阵列中波束产生单元的振膜的大小来实现对通道121附近质点振动影响的调整。In some other embodiments, the influence of the vibration of particles near the channel 121 can be adjusted by adjusting the size of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit in the beam generating unit array.
示例性的,可以设置靠近通道121附近的波束产生单元的振膜的面积最大,靠近侧壁111的波束产生单元的振膜面积较小,位于两者之间的波束产生单元的振膜面积最小。波束产生单元的振膜面积不同,其产生的子波束的振幅不同,也就是说,通过调整不同波束产生单元的振膜的面积可以实现对于扬声器100输出的第二波束的调整。For example, the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit near the channel 121 may be the largest, the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit near the side wall 111 may be smaller, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit between the two may be the smallest. The diaphragm areas of the beam generating units are different, and the amplitudes of the sub-beams generated by them are different. That is, the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be adjusted by adjusting the diaphragm areas of different beam generating units.
对于振膜面积大小的调整,既可以通过制备波束产生模组140的过程中为不同的波束产生单元设置不同大小的振膜,也可以对制备好的波束产生模组140的振膜进行化学或物理方式的处理,以使得 波束产生单元的振膜的部分或全部失效,从而得到不同振膜面积的波束产生单元。示例性的,通过化学溶液对波束产生模组140的振膜进行刻蚀处理,刻蚀之后的振膜失效,无法产生波束,未刻蚀处理的振膜可以正常产生波束。振膜刻蚀处理后的区域可以称为无效辐射区域,未进行刻蚀处理区域可以称为有效辐射区域。The diaphragm area can be adjusted by setting diaphragms of different sizes for different beam generating units during the preparation of the beam generating module 140, or by chemically or physically treating the diaphragm of the prepared beam generating module 140 so that The diaphragm of the beam generating unit is partially or completely ineffective, thereby obtaining beam generating units with different diaphragm areas. Exemplarily, the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140 is etched by a chemical solution, and the diaphragm after etching is ineffective and cannot generate beams, while the diaphragm that has not been etched can generate beams normally. The area after the diaphragm is etched can be called an invalid radiation area, and the area that has not been etched can be called an effective radiation area.
这里需要说明的是,前述无效辐射区域是指无法发出波束的区域,该区域的振膜可以在处理后被损坏,也可以在处理过程中直接消解,也就是说无效辐射区域为处理前存在振膜处理后不存在振膜的区域。It should be noted here that the aforementioned invalid radiation area refers to an area where a beam cannot be emitted. The diaphragm in this area may be damaged after treatment or directly eliminated during the treatment. In other words, the invalid radiation area is an area where a diaphragm exists before treatment but no diaphragm exists after treatment.
图18为又一扬声器100的俯视图,图18示例性的提供了一种设置不同振膜面积的波束产生单元的阵列。图18所示的多个波束产生单元的Y轴方向的尺寸相同,多个波束产生单元的X方向的尺寸可以包括c1、c2和c3,其中c3>c1>c2。Fig. 18 is a top view of another speaker 100, and Fig. 18 exemplarily provides an array of beam generating units with different diaphragm areas. The dimensions of the multiple beam generating units in the Y-axis direction shown in Fig. 18 are the same, and the dimensions of the multiple beam generating units in the X-axis direction may include c1, c2, and c3, where c3>c1>c2.
图19为图18中mm'截面示意图,波束产生单元140A、140B和140C的振膜面积的大小关系与其在X方向上的尺寸的大小关系一致,即波束产生单元140C的振膜面积大于波束产生单元140A的振膜面积,波束产生单元140A的振膜面积大于波束产生单元140B的振膜面积。波束产生单元140A产生的波束的振动曲线示意图可以用图20中的L1表示,波束产生单元140B产生的波束的振动曲线示意图可以用图20中的L2表示,波束产生单元140C产生的波束的振动曲线示意图可以用图20中的L3表示。由于波束产生单元140C的振膜面积最大,其产生的波束L3的振幅X3相应也最大,波束产生单元140A的振膜面积介于波束产生单元140C的振膜面积和波束产生单元140B的振膜面积之间,相应的,波束产生单元140A产生的波束L1的振幅X1也介于X2和X3之间。即,前述三类波束产生单元产生的波束的振幅满足:X3>X1>X2。FIG19 is a schematic diagram of the mm' cross section in FIG18, and the size relationship of the diaphragm areas of the beam generating units 140A, 140B, and 140C is consistent with the size relationship of their dimensions in the X direction, that is, the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140C is larger than the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A is larger than the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140B. The schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140A can be represented by L1 in FIG20, the schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140B can be represented by L2 in FIG20, and the schematic diagram of the vibration curve of the beam generated by the beam generating unit 140C can be represented by L3 in FIG20. Since the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140C is the largest, the amplitude X3 of the beam L3 generated by it is also the largest accordingly, and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140A is between the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140C and the diaphragm area of the beam generating unit 140B, accordingly, the amplitude X1 of the beam L1 generated by the beam generating unit 140A is also between X2 and X3. That is, the amplitudes of the beams generated by the above three types of beam generating units satisfy: X3>X1>X2.
同样以通道121附近的质点E为研究对象,假设图20中波束L1、L2和L3到达质点E时的相位均在波峰处,则波束L1、L2和L3可以引起质点E振动的振动幅度的大小关系与三种波束的振幅相关,也就是说,波束产生单元140C产生的波束对于质点E振动的影响最大,波束产生单元140A产生的波速对于质点E振动的影响次之,波束产生单元140B产生的波束对于质点E振动的影响最小,相应的,波束产生单元140C产生的波束对于通道121附近的声压透射率的影响最大,波束产生单元140A产生的波速对于通道121附近的声压透射率的影响次之,波束产生单元140B产生的波束对于通道121附近的声压透射率的影响最小。Similarly, taking particle E near channel 121 as the research object, assuming that the phases of beams L1, L2 and L3 in Figure 20 when they arrive at particle E are all at the peak, then the relationship between the amplitudes of vibration of particle E caused by beams L1, L2 and L3 is related to the amplitudes of the three beams, that is, the beam generated by beam generating unit 140C has the greatest impact on the vibration of particle E, the wave velocity generated by beam generating unit 140A has the second greatest impact on the vibration of particle E, and the beam generated by beam generating unit 140B has the least impact on the vibration of particle E. Correspondingly, the beam generated by beam generating unit 140C has the greatest impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121, the wave velocity generated by beam generating unit 140A has the second greatest impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121, and the beam generated by beam generating unit 140B has the least impact on the sound pressure transmittance near channel 121.
通过改变不同波束产生单元的振膜面积的大小可以调整波束产生单元产生的波束对于阀门附近质点振动的影响的大小。质点的振动幅度越大,相应的质点周围产生的声压越大,更高的声压有利于阀门120对波束产生模组140产生波束的调制,以使得扬声器100输出的可听声保留更多的声音信息,更容易被人耳感知。By changing the size of the diaphragm area of different beam generating units, the influence of the beam generated by the beam generating unit on the vibration of the particle near the valve can be adjusted. The greater the vibration amplitude of the particle, the greater the sound pressure generated around the corresponding particle. The higher sound pressure is conducive to the modulation of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 by the valve 120, so that the audible sound output by the speaker 100 retains more sound information and is easier to be perceived by the human ear.
扬声器内包含的波束产生模组可以包含多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元产生的子波束共同组成了波束产生模组140产生的第一波束,通过调整多个波束产生单元的振膜面积、排布方式、发送时延等属性,进而可以实现对于多个波束产生单元产生的波束的传播路径的调整,使得更多的波束、波束的更高的能量能够在通道处汇聚,从而有利于提高扬声器输出的目标声波的声压。The beam generating module included in the speaker may include multiple beam generating units. The sub-beams generated by the multiple beam generating units together constitute the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140. By adjusting the diaphragm area, arrangement, transmission delay and other properties of the multiple beam generating units, the propagation paths of the beams generated by the multiple beam generating units can be adjusted, so that more beams and higher energy of the beams can be converged at the channel, which is beneficial to improve the sound pressure of the target sound waves output by the speaker.
除了前述实施例中提供的波束产生模组140外,本申请还提供了又一些不同结构的波束产生模组140,具体如图21至图25所示。In addition to the beam generating module 140 provided in the aforementioned embodiment, the present application also provides some beam generating modules 140 with different structures, as specifically shown in FIG. 21 to FIG. 25 .
如图21所示为又一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,波束产生模组140可以包含多个波束产生单元,该多个波束产生单元的高度(图21中Z轴方向上的尺寸)可以不同,或者说,多个波束产生单元各自所包含的振膜所处的高度不同,又或者说,多个波束产生单元的振膜141距离阀门120的长度不同。在一些示例中,如图21,距离通道121较远的波束产生单元的高度H1较高,距离通道121较近的波束产生单元的高度H2较低。FIG21 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140. The beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction in FIG21) of the plurality of beam generating units may be different, or in other words, the diaphragms included in the plurality of beam generating units are at different heights, or in other words, the diaphragms 141 of the plurality of beam generating units are at different lengths from the valve 120. In some examples, as shown in FIG21 , the height H1 of the beam generating unit farther from the channel 121 is higher, and the height H2 of the beam generating unit closer to the channel 121 is lower.
在一些实施例中,振膜141的上表面可以为平面或曲面,振膜的上表面可以水平放置或倾斜放置,振膜的高度可以理解为振膜相对于扬声器底部的平均高度、最低点高度、最高点高度或中心点高度等。In some embodiments, the upper surface of the diaphragm 141 can be a plane or a curved surface, the upper surface of the diaphragm can be placed horizontally or tilted, and the height of the diaphragm can be understood as the average height, lowest point height, highest point height or center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
通过调节不同波束产生单元的高度,以使得距离通道121不同的波束产生单元的振膜在扬声器100的厚度方向上产生差异,从而有利于达到调整不同波束产生单元产生的波束的传播路径的目的,有利于提高对于扬声器100的腔体空间的利用率。By adjusting the heights of different beam generating units, the diaphragms of beam generating units at different distances from the channel 121 will have differences in the thickness direction of the speaker 100, thereby helping to adjust the propagation paths of the beams generated by different beam generating units and improving the utilization rate of the cavity space of the speaker 100.
如图22所示为又一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,波束产生模组140可以包含多个波束产生 单元,振膜141的上表面相对于扬声器的底面可以倾斜放置,且至少部分振膜141的倾斜角度不同。至少部分该多个波束产生单元的振膜141与扬声器的底面(与XY平面平行且远离通道121的一面)形成的夹角可以不同。或者说,多个波束产生单元的振膜的法线方向不同。在一些示例中,对于远离通道121的波束产生单元的振膜,其与扬声器100的底面所成的夹角α较大;对于靠近通道121的波束产生单元的振膜,其与扬声器100的底面所成的夹角β较小。FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view of another beam generating module 140. The beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating modules. Unit, the upper surface of the diaphragm 141 can be tilted relative to the bottom surface of the speaker, and the tilt angles of at least some of the diaphragms 141 are different. The angles formed by the diaphragms 141 of at least some of the multiple beam generating units and the bottom surface of the speaker (a side parallel to the XY plane and away from the channel 121) can be different. In other words, the normal directions of the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units are different. In some examples, for the diaphragm of the beam generating unit far away from the channel 121, the angle α formed by it and the bottom surface of the speaker 100 is larger; for the diaphragm of the beam generating unit close to the channel 121, the angle β formed by it and the bottom surface of the speaker 100 is smaller.
通过调节不同波束产生单元的振膜与扬声器100的底面所成的夹角的大小,可以实现对于不同波束产生单元的振膜产生的波束的传播方向的调整,有利于使得不同振膜产生的波束朝向通道121的方向传播,波束在传播至通道121处的过程中需要进行的反射或散射的次数较少,有利于提高扬声器100输出第二波束的声压。By adjusting the angle between the diaphragms of different beam generating units and the bottom surface of the loudspeaker 100, the propagation direction of the beams generated by the diaphragms of different beam generating units can be adjusted, which is beneficial for making the beams generated by different diaphragms propagate in the direction of the channel 121. The number of reflections or scatterings required in the process of propagating to the channel 121 is relatively small, which is beneficial for increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the loudspeaker 100.
在一些实施例中,至少部分振膜141的高度可以不同,振膜的高度可以理解为振膜对于扬声器底部的平均高度、最低点高度、最高点高度或中心点高度等。In some embodiments, the height of at least part of the diaphragm 141 may be different. The height of the diaphragm may be understood as the average height, the lowest point height, the highest point height or the center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
如图23所示为又一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,波束产生模组140可以包含多个波束产生单元,该多个波束产生单元的振膜可以为曲面振膜或弧面振膜等非平面振膜。在一些示例中,多个波束产生单元设置有曲面振膜,曲面振膜的表面构成波束产生单元的辐射面,曲面振膜的开口方向或者说辐射面的朝向可以为朝向通道121的方向。FIG23 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140. The beam generating module 140 may include multiple beam generating units, and the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units may be non-planar diaphragms such as curved diaphragms or arc diaphragms. In some examples, the multiple beam generating units are provided with curved diaphragms, and the surface of the curved diaphragms constitutes the radiation surface of the beam generating units. The opening direction of the curved diaphragms or the direction of the radiation surface may be toward the channel 121.
将多个波束产生单元的振膜设置为非平面的结构,有利于将波束产生单元上振膜的不同区域产生的波束进行汇聚,汇聚后的波束可以向通道121附近传播,有利于提高扬声器100输出的第二波束的声压。Setting the diaphragms of multiple beam generating units as a non-planar structure is beneficial to converging the beams generated by different areas of the diaphragms on the beam generating units. The converged beams can propagate toward the vicinity of the channel 121, which is beneficial to increasing the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker 100.
在一些实施例中,至少部分振膜141的高度可以不同,振膜的高度可以理解为振膜对于扬声器底部的平均高度、最低点高度、最高点高度或中心点高度等。In some embodiments, the height of at least part of the diaphragm 141 may be different. The height of the diaphragm may be understood as the average height, the lowest point height, the highest point height or the center point height of the diaphragm relative to the bottom of the speaker.
如图24所示为又一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,波束产生模组140可以包括多个波束产生单元,该多个波束产生单元的振膜处于不同的平面内,或,该多个波束产生单元的振膜倾斜放置。多个波束产生单元的振膜可以相互平行,也可以不相互平行。该多个波束产生单元的振膜在投影面上的正投影可以部分重叠也可以全部重叠,该投影面可以为与扬声器100的厚度方向平行的任一平面,例如,扬声器100的侧壁111所在的平面。FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140. The beam generating module 140 may include a plurality of beam generating units, and the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units are in different planes, or the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units are tilted. The diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units may be parallel to each other or may not be parallel to each other. The orthographic projections of the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units on the projection plane may partially overlap or completely overlap, and the projection plane may be any plane parallel to the thickness direction of the speaker 100, for example, the plane where the side wall 111 of the speaker 100 is located.
在一些示例中,多个振膜的一边固定于扬声器100的底面,该多个振膜的另一边固定于支架147上。用于固定多个振膜的支架147的高度(Z轴方向上的尺寸)相同。在这种情况下,多个振膜在扬声器100的侧壁上的正投影可以全部重叠。In some examples, one side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bottom surface of the speaker 100, and the other side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bracket 147. The heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction) of the brackets 147 used to fix the plurality of diaphragms are the same. In this case, the orthographic projections of the plurality of diaphragms on the side wall of the speaker 100 may all overlap.
在另一些示例中,多个振膜的一边固定于扬声器100的底面,该多个振膜的另一边固定于支架147上。用于固定多个振膜的支架147的高度(Z轴方向上的尺寸)不相同。在这种情况下,多个振膜在扬声器100的侧壁上的正投影可以部分重叠。In other examples, one side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bottom surface of the speaker 100, and the other side of the plurality of diaphragms is fixed to the bracket 147. The heights (dimensions in the Z-axis direction) of the brackets 147 used to fix the plurality of diaphragms are different. In this case, the orthographic projections of the plurality of diaphragms on the side wall of the speaker 100 may partially overlap.
图24中波束产生模组140包含的多个波束产生单元可以相连排列,或者说,相邻两个波束产生单元之间可以不设置有间隙。该波束产生单元阵列的设置,一方面通过缩小波束产生单元在扬声器100的底部112所在平面内的间隙,提高了底部112面积的利用率,另一方面,通过设置支架147,抬高了振膜的一边,间接地增大了波束产生单元的振膜的面积,有利于提升扬声器100输出的第二声波的声压。The multiple beam generating units included in the beam generating module 140 in FIG24 can be arranged in a continuous manner, or in other words, there can be no gap between two adjacent beam generating units. The arrangement of the beam generating unit array, on the one hand, improves the utilization rate of the area of the bottom 112 by reducing the gap between the beam generating units in the plane where the bottom 112 of the speaker 100 is located, and on the other hand, by arranging the bracket 147, one side of the diaphragm is raised, which indirectly increases the area of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit, which is conducive to improving the sound pressure of the second sound wave output by the speaker 100.
上述用于固定振膜的支架147靠近相邻波束产生单元的振膜的一侧可以连接有反射面,该反射面上可以涂覆有有利于波束反射的涂层,从而可以使得振膜发送的波束经反射面的反射向靠近通道221的方向传播。The bracket 147 for fixing the diaphragm may be connected to a reflective surface on one side of the diaphragm close to the adjacent beam generating unit, and the reflective surface may be coated with a coating that is beneficial to beam reflection, so that the beam sent by the diaphragm can be reflected by the reflective surface and propagate in a direction close to the channel 221.
图25示出了另一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,该波束产生模组140可以包含多个波束产生单元,多个波束产生单元的振膜在与扬声器100的厚度方向平行的平面上的投影可以相互重叠。该多个波束产生单元的振膜所在平面可以相交。在一些示例中,位于通道121一侧的波束产生单元的振膜相平行,振膜的法向均为第一方向,位于通道121另一侧的波束产生单元的振膜相互平行,振膜的法向均为第二方向,第一方向和第二方向均朝向通道121的方向。通过调整不同波束产生单元的振膜的朝向(开口方向)或辐射面的朝向有利于使得更多的子波束向通道121附近汇聚,有利于提升扬声器100输出第二波束的声压。FIG25 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which may include multiple beam generating units, and the projections of the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units on a plane parallel to the thickness direction of the speaker 100 may overlap with each other. The planes where the diaphragms of the multiple beam generating units are located may intersect. In some examples, the diaphragms of the beam generating units located on one side of the channel 121 are parallel, and the normals of the diaphragms are all in the first direction, and the diaphragms of the beam generating units located on the other side of the channel 121 are parallel to each other, and the normals of the diaphragms are all in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction are both in the direction of the channel 121. By adjusting the orientation (opening direction) of the diaphragms of different beam generating units or the orientation of the radiation surface, it is beneficial to make more sub-beams converge near the channel 121, which is beneficial to increase the sound pressure of the second beam output by the speaker 100.
图24和图25所示的波束产生模组140中,通过设置波束产生单元的振膜一边与扬声器100的底面连接,另一边与支架连接,这就使得多个波束产生单元可以紧挨着布置,有利于提高扬声器100的 底面的面积的利用率,另一方面,也通过利用扬声器100腔体的空间,一定程度上增大了波束产生单元的振膜的面积,有利于提高扬声器100输出可听声的声压。In the beam generating module 140 shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 , the diaphragm of the beam generating unit is connected to the bottom surface of the speaker 100 on one side and to the bracket on the other side, so that multiple beam generating units can be arranged closely together, which is beneficial to improving the speaker 100. On the other hand, the utilization rate of the bottom surface area also increases the area of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit to a certain extent by utilizing the space of the speaker 100 cavity, which is beneficial to improving the sound pressure of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
图26示出了另一种波束产生模组140的剖面示意图,该波束产生模组140可以设置有多个振膜,该多个振膜可以层叠排列。在一些示例中,该波束产生模组140包括第一振膜141A、第二振膜141B和第三振膜141C,该三个振膜可以通过支架147固定连接,该三个振膜在扬声器100的底面上的正投影可以完全重叠或部分重叠。Fig. 26 shows a cross-sectional schematic diagram of another beam generating module 140, which may be provided with a plurality of diaphragms, which may be arranged in a stacked manner. In some examples, the beam generating module 140 includes a first diaphragm 141A, a second diaphragm 141B, and a third diaphragm 141C, which may be fixedly connected by a bracket 147, and the orthographic projections of the three diaphragms on the bottom surface of the speaker 100 may completely overlap or partially overlap.
设置于同一个波束产生单元上的多个振膜可以由不同的材料制备得到,从而使得不同的振膜可以具备不同的性能,当对该多个振膜输入相同的电信号的情况下,多个振膜可以产生不同的波束。或者,可以通过向设置于同一个波束产生单元上的多个振膜输入不同的电信号,从而使得该多个振膜产生不同的波束。在同一个波束产生单元上沿扬声器100的厚度方向上层叠设置多个振膜,有利于增大同一个波束产生单元的振膜面积,有利于提高对于扬声器100的内腔空间的利用率。The multiple diaphragms arranged on the same beam generating unit can be made of different materials, so that different diaphragms can have different performances. When the same electrical signal is input to the multiple diaphragms, the multiple diaphragms can generate different beams. Alternatively, different electrical signals can be input to the multiple diaphragms arranged on the same beam generating unit, so that the multiple diaphragms generate different beams. Stacking multiple diaphragms on the same beam generating unit along the thickness direction of the speaker 100 is beneficial to increase the diaphragm area of the same beam generating unit, and is beneficial to improve the utilization rate of the inner cavity space of the speaker 100.
在又一些实施例中,可以在扬声器100的腔体内设置不同类型的波束引导结构130以实现对于通道121附近声压的调整。In some other embodiments, different types of beam guiding structures 130 may be disposed in the cavity of the speaker 100 to adjust the sound pressure near the channel 121 .
图27所示为设置有引导面131的扬声器100沿X-Z平面的截面示意图。FIG27 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 provided with the guide surface 131 along the X-Z plane.
引导面131可以用于将波束产生模组140产生的波束引导至通道121附近,以使得原本分散在扬声器100的腔体内的波束能够汇聚至通道121附近,从而在一定程度上提高通道121附近的声压以及声压的透射率。换句话说,引导面131可以用于使得波束产生模组140产生的第一波束传播至通道121附近的传播空间从远离通道121的位置至靠近121的位置逐渐收窄,即引导面131为从一个或多个波束产生模组140的边缘位置到通道121的斜面。又或者说,该引导面131可以包括靠近侧壁111的第一边以及靠近通道121的第二边,从第一边至第二边,该引导面与侧壁的垂直距离逐渐缩小,且该引导面与阀门的垂直距离逐渐增大。The guide surface 131 can be used to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, so that the beam originally dispersed in the cavity of the speaker 100 can be converged to the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby improving the sound pressure and the transmittance of the sound pressure near the channel 121 to a certain extent. In other words, the guide surface 131 can be used to gradually narrow the propagation space of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 from a position far from the channel 121 to a position close to 121, that is, the guide surface 131 is an inclined surface from the edge position of one or more beam generating modules 140 to the channel 121. In other words, the guide surface 131 can include a first side close to the side wall 111 and a second side close to the channel 121, and from the first side to the second side, the vertical distance between the guide surface and the side wall gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface and the valve gradually increases.
引导面131靠近阀门120的一边可以与阀门120朝向扬声器100内腔的内壁连接。引导面131远离阀门220的一边可以与扬声器100的内侧壁连接,也可以与波束产生模组140的朝向阀门220的一面(靠近振膜的一面)连接。The side of the guide surface 131 close to the valve 120 can be connected to the inner wall of the valve 120 facing the inner cavity of the speaker 100. The side of the guide surface 131 away from the valve 220 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100, or to the side of the beam generating module 140 facing the valve 220 (the side close to the diaphragm).
在一些示例中,扬声器100内腔中设置有一个引导面131,该引导面131为平面,以引导面131在如图27所示的X-Z截面上远离阀门120且与扬声器100的内侧壁连接的一端为坐标原点,则该引导面131上的任一点的坐标具有如下规律:随着x坐标值的逐渐增大,z坐标值的逐渐增大。例如,引导面131上点的z坐标值可以随着x坐标值等比例增大。该引导面131可以构成一个斜坡或斜面,斜面的一面可以与阀门120连接,斜面的另一面与侧壁111连接,斜面与阀门120所在平面所成的夹角可以为锐角,斜面与侧壁111所成的夹角也可以为锐角。入射到该斜面上的第一波束或者第一波束的子波束可以在经过该斜面的反射等作用后向靠近通道121的位置传播,即入射到该斜面上的第一波束或者第一波束的子波束传播至通道121的传播路径发生改变。In some examples, a guide surface 131 is provided in the inner cavity of the speaker 100. The guide surface 131 is a plane. With the end of the guide surface 131 on the X-Z section shown in FIG. 27 away from the valve 120 and connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 as the origin of the coordinates, the coordinates of any point on the guide surface 131 have the following rule: as the x-coordinate value gradually increases, the z-coordinate value gradually increases. For example, the z-coordinate value of the point on the guide surface 131 can increase in proportion to the x-coordinate value. The guide surface 131 can form a slope or an inclined plane, one side of the inclined plane can be connected to the valve 120, and the other side of the inclined plane can be connected to the side wall 111. The angle formed by the inclined plane and the plane where the valve 120 is located can be an acute angle, and the angle formed by the inclined plane and the side wall 111 can also be an acute angle. The first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam incident on the inclined surface can propagate to a position close to the channel 121 after reflection from the inclined surface, that is, the propagation path of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam incident on the inclined surface to the channel 121 changes.
在另一些示例中,扬声器100内腔中设置有一个引导面131,该引导面131为曲面,以引导面131在如图28所示的X-Z截面上远离阀门120且与扬声器100的内侧壁连接的一端为坐标原点,则该引导面131上的任一点的坐标具有如下规律:随着x坐标值的逐渐增大,z坐标值的逐渐增大。例如,引导面131上点的z坐标值随着x坐标值增大的比例与x轴坐标值满足一定的函数关系。例如,z坐标值增大的比例与x轴坐标值满足线性函数关系或幂数函数关系或指数函数关系等。In other examples, a guide surface 131 is provided in the inner cavity of the speaker 100, and the guide surface 131 is a curved surface. With the end of the guide surface 131 on the X-Z section shown in FIG. 28 away from the valve 120 and connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 as the origin of the coordinates, the coordinates of any point on the guide surface 131 have the following rule: as the x-coordinate value gradually increases, the z-coordinate value gradually increases. For example, the ratio of the z-coordinate value of the point on the guide surface 131 as the x-coordinate value increases satisfies a certain functional relationship with the x-axis coordinate value. For example, the ratio of the increase of the z-coordinate value satisfies a linear functional relationship, a power functional relationship, an exponential functional relationship, etc. with the x-axis coordinate value.
换句话说,阀门120面向容纳腔150的一面上可以设置第一连接位置,扬声器100的壳体110的侧壁111的内侧或者底部112上可以设置有第二连接位置,第一连接位置和第二连接位置之间连接有前述的引导面131,第一连接位置和第二连接位置之间可以是平滑连接的,也可以是非平滑连接的。也就是说,引导面131可以是平滑的曲面,也可以是设置有弯折部等的非平滑的曲面。引导面131在第一连接位置处与阀门120所在平面的夹角和引导面在第二连接位置处与壳体110的侧壁111所在平面或底部112所在平面的夹角可以影响波束产生模组140产生的第一波束或者第一波束的子波束入射到引导面上的入射角,进而可以影响第一波束或者第一波束的子波束向通道121处传播的路径。也就是说,调整引导面131的形状、位置和在连接位置处与另一平面的夹角可以达到调整扬声器100输出的第二波束的目的。In other words, a first connection position may be provided on the side of the valve 120 facing the accommodating chamber 150, and a second connection position may be provided on the inner side of the side wall 111 or the bottom 112 of the housing 110 of the speaker 100. The aforementioned guide surface 131 is connected between the first connection position and the second connection position, and the first connection position and the second connection position may be smoothly connected or non-smoothly connected. In other words, the guide surface 131 may be a smooth curved surface or a non-smooth curved surface provided with a bending portion or the like. The angle between the guide surface 131 and the plane where the valve 120 is located at the first connection position and the angle between the guide surface and the plane where the side wall 111 or the bottom 112 of the housing 110 is located at the second connection position may affect the incident angle of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 incident on the guide surface, and further may affect the path of the first beam or the sub-beam of the first beam propagating to the channel 121. That is, the purpose of adjusting the second beam output by the speaker 100 can be achieved by adjusting the shape, position and the angle between the guide surface 131 and another plane at the connection position.
引导面131既可以设置在扬声器100的单侧,或者说,扬声器100内腔中设置有一个引导面131, 如图27或者图28所示。扬声器100内腔的部分侧壁设置有引导面131,或者扬声器100内腔的侧壁可以均设置有引导面131。例如,当扬声器100内腔为圆柱形时,扬声器100内腔具有环形侧壁时,则引导面131围绕环形侧壁一周。当扬声器100内腔为立方体时,扬声器100内腔包括四个依次连接的侧壁,四个侧壁可以均设置有引导面131。如图29所示为又一引导面131的剖面视图,在图29中,示出了两个相对设置的侧壁,两个相对设置的侧壁各有一引导面131,该两个引导面131的形状或类型可以相同也可以不同,在两个引导面131的形状相同的情况下,两个引导面131可以关于扬声器100在X-Z平面内的对称轴对称。前述关于引导面131为平面或者曲面的形状的描述同样适用于引导面131的数量为多个,或者引导面131为环形结构的情况。设置两个引导面131可以进一步地将波束产生模组140产生的波束引导至通道121附近,有利于进一步提高扬声器100对波束产生模组140产生的波束的调制效果,提高扬声器100输出的可听声的质量。The guide surface 131 can be disposed on one side of the speaker 100, or in other words, a guide surface 131 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100. As shown in FIG. 27 or FIG. 28. Some side walls of the inner cavity of the speaker 100 are provided with guide surfaces 131, or the side walls of the inner cavity of the speaker 100 can be provided with guide surfaces 131. For example, when the inner cavity of the speaker 100 is cylindrical, and the inner cavity of the speaker 100 has an annular side wall, the guide surface 131 surrounds the annular side wall. When the inner cavity of the speaker 100 is a cube, the inner cavity of the speaker 100 includes four side walls connected in sequence, and the four side walls can be provided with guide surfaces 131. As shown in FIG. 29, it is a cross-sectional view of another guide surface 131. In FIG. 29, two oppositely arranged side walls are shown, and each of the two oppositely arranged side walls has a guide surface 131. The shapes or types of the two guide surfaces 131 can be the same or different. In the case where the shapes of the two guide surfaces 131 are the same, the two guide surfaces 131 can be symmetrical about the symmetry axis of the speaker 100 in the XZ plane. The above description of the shape of the guide surface 131 being a plane or a curved surface is also applicable to the case where the number of the guide surfaces 131 is multiple, or the guide surface 131 is an annular structure. Providing two guiding surfaces 131 can further guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 , which is beneficial to further improve the modulation effect of the speaker 100 on the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 and improve the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100 .
引导结构130既可以适用于对称阀门(如图27至29所示)。如图30所示为又一引导结构130的剖面视图,引导结构130也适用于非对称阀门,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123在Z轴方向上的高度不同,第二子阀门123相对于第一子阀门122靠近波束产生模组140设置。引导面131可以设置在靠近第一子阀门122的一侧也可以设置在靠近第二子阀门123的一侧。在引导面131设置在靠近第二子阀门123一侧的情况下,引导面131的设置有利于将位于第二子阀门123一侧的波束产生单元产生的多个波束引导至靠近第一子阀门122的一侧,有利于进一步提高非对称阀门结构的扬声器100在通道开启状态下对于波束产生模组140产生的波束的声压的透射率。The guide structure 130 can be applied to symmetrical valves (as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 ). FIG. 30 shows a cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 . The guide structure 130 is also applicable to asymmetrical valves. The first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have different heights in the Z-axis direction, and the second sub-valve 123 is arranged close to the beam generating module 140 relative to the first sub-valve 122. The guide surface 131 can be arranged on a side close to the first sub-valve 122 or on a side close to the second sub-valve 123. In the case where the guide surface 131 is arranged on a side close to the second sub-valve 123, the arrangement of the guide surface 131 is conducive to guiding the multiple beams generated by the beam generating unit located on one side of the second sub-valve 123 to the side close to the first sub-valve 122, which is conducive to further improving the transmittance of the speaker 100 with an asymmetrical valve structure to the sound pressure of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 when the channel is open.
引导结构130也可以是块体结构,或称为引导体132。如图30所示的引导体132可以包括前述的任一种引导面131。在扬声器100内设置有多个引导面131的情况,该包含引导面131的引导体132可以分别为单独的块体,或者,多个引导体132也可以相互连接形成一个块体。The guide structure 130 may also be a block structure, or referred to as a guide body 132. The guide body 132 shown in FIG30 may include any of the aforementioned guide surfaces 131. In the case where a plurality of guide surfaces 131 are provided in the speaker 100, the guide bodies 132 including the guide surfaces 131 may be separate blocks, or the plurality of guide bodies 132 may be connected to each other to form a block.
该引导体132设置在扬声器100的内腔,该引导体132包含的引导面131可以用于将波束产生模组140产生的波束引导至通道121附近,以使得原本分散在扬声器100的腔体内的波束能够汇聚至通道221附近,以进行相应的调制。换句话说,引导体132可以用于使得波束产生模组140产生的第一波束传播至通道121附近的传播空间从远离通道121的位置至靠近通道121的位置逐渐收窄。The guide body 132 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100, and the guide surface 131 included in the guide body 132 can be used to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, so that the beam originally dispersed in the cavity of the speaker 100 can be converged to the vicinity of the channel 221 for corresponding modulation. In other words, the guide body 132 can be used to make the propagation space of the first beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121 gradually narrow from a position far from the channel 121 to a position close to the channel 121.
在一些示例中,如图30所示,引导体132可以与扬声器100的壳体210形成一体的结构,或者说,引导体132可以与扬声器100的壳体110通过一体成型的方式制备得到。或者说,扬声器100的内壁上设置有可以调整波束传播路径和/或波束传播方向的结构,例如,扬声器100的侧壁可以设置有凸起,该凸起容置于扬声器100的腔体中,该凸起靠近波束产生模组140的一面可以为引导面131,从而,该凸起可以用于调整波束产生模组140产生的波束的传播路径和/或传播方向等。将引导体132与扬声器100的壳体110通过一体成型的方式制备,有利于简化扬声器100的装配工艺,且相比于装配成型的工艺,一体成型的方式有利于提高扬声器100的结构组件的稳定性,有利于提高扬声器100的性能的稳定性,提升用户的使用体验。In some examples, as shown in FIG. 30 , the guide body 132 may form an integral structure with the housing 210 of the speaker 100, or the guide body 132 may be prepared by integral molding with the housing 110 of the speaker 100. In other words, a structure that can adjust the beam propagation path and/or beam propagation direction is provided on the inner wall of the speaker 100. For example, a protrusion may be provided on the side wall of the speaker 100, and the protrusion may be accommodated in the cavity of the speaker 100. The side of the protrusion close to the beam generating module 140 may be a guide surface 131, so that the protrusion may be used to adjust the propagation path and/or propagation direction of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140. Preparing the guide body 132 and the housing 110 of the speaker 100 by integral molding is conducive to simplifying the assembly process of the speaker 100. Compared with the assembly molding process, the integral molding method is conducive to improving the stability of the structural components of the speaker 100, the stability of the performance of the speaker 100, and the user experience.
在另一些实施例中,如图31所示为又一种引导体132的剖面视图,引导体132可以与扬声器100的阀门120形成一体的结构,或者说,引导体132可以与扬声器100的阀门120通过一体成型的方式制备得到。或者说,薄板状的阀门120靠近波束产生模组140的一面为可以用于调整波束产生模组140产生的波束的引导面131。在这种情况下,阀门120即为引导体132,引导体132或者阀门120可以为薄片状。例如,如图31中,第一子阀门122和第二子阀门123朝向扬声器100的内腔的一面均具备调整波束的传播路径和/或传播方向功能的引导面131。一种可能的实现方式是,引导体132或阀门120远离扬声器100的内腔的一面(或称外表面)和靠近扬声器100的内腔的一面(或称内表面)由相同的材料(例如压电材料)制备而成,这样,在阀门120在收到控制信号时,阀门120或引导体132的内表面和外表面均会发生形变。In other embodiments, as shown in FIG. 31 , there is another cross-sectional view of a guide body 132. The guide body 132 can form an integral structure with the valve 120 of the speaker 100, or in other words, the guide body 132 can be prepared by integrally molding with the valve 120 of the speaker 100. In other words, one side of the thin plate-like valve 120 close to the beam generating module 140 is a guide surface 131 that can be used to adjust the beam generated by the beam generating module 140. In this case, the valve 120 is the guide body 132, and the guide body 132 or the valve 120 can be in the form of a thin sheet. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 , the first sub-valve 122 and the second sub-valve 123 have a guide surface 131 that has the function of adjusting the propagation path and/or propagation direction of the beam on one side facing the inner cavity of the speaker 100. One possible implementation method is that the side of the guide body 132 or the valve 120 away from the inner cavity of the speaker 100 (or the outer surface) and the side close to the inner cavity of the speaker 100 (or the inner surface) are made of the same material (for example, piezoelectric material). In this way, when the valve 120 receives a control signal, both the inner surface and the outer surface of the valve 120 or the guide body 132 will deform.
将引导体132与扬声器100的阀门120通过一体成型的方式制备,有利于简化扬声器100的装配工艺,且相比于装配成型的工艺,一体成型的方式有利于提高扬声器100的结构组件的稳定性,有利于提高扬声器100的性能的稳定性,提升用户的使用体验。Preparing the guide body 132 and the valve 120 of the speaker 100 by integral molding is beneficial to simplifying the assembly process of the speaker 100. Compared with the assembly molding process, the integral molding method is beneficial to improving the stability of the structural components of the speaker 100, improving the stability of the performance of the speaker 100, and enhancing the user experience.
在又一些示例中,如图32所示为又一种引导体132的剖面视图,引导体132可以为独立的结构单元。或者说,扬声器100的壳体110、引导体132和阀门120可以分别制备后进行组装而组成扬声器100。该引导体132可以包括引导面131以及至少一个连接面133。该至少一个连接面133可以与阀门 120朝向扬声器100腔体一侧的阀门壁连接,或者,该至少一个连接面133也可以与扬声器100的相邻的2个内侧壁中的一个或多个连接。In some other examples, as shown in FIG. 32, a cross-sectional view of another guide body 132 is shown, and the guide body 132 may be an independent structural unit. In other words, the housing 110, the guide body 132 and the valve 120 of the speaker 100 may be prepared separately and then assembled to form the speaker 100. The guide body 132 may include a guide surface 131 and at least one connecting surface 133. The at least one connecting surface 133 may be connected to the valve 120. 120 is connected to the valve wall on one side of the speaker 100 cavity, or the at least one connecting surface 133 can also be connected to one or more of the two adjacent inner walls of the speaker 100.
引导体132作为一个独立的结构单元,有利于将扬声器100包含的多个功能单元之间相互解耦,有利于实现通过改变引导体132的结构、形状等性质来对扬声器100的性能的调整。并且,由于不同功能单元之间相互解耦,当扬声器100的某一个功能结构受损需要拆卸维修时,本技术方案提供的扬声器100仅需要对受损结构单元进行拆卸、维修,方便扬声器100的使用过程中的维修、维护。The guide body 132, as an independent structural unit, is conducive to decoupling the multiple functional units included in the speaker 100, and is conducive to adjusting the performance of the speaker 100 by changing the structure, shape and other properties of the guide body 132. In addition, since different functional units are decoupled from each other, when a functional structure of the speaker 100 is damaged and needs to be disassembled and repaired, the speaker 100 provided by the technical solution only needs to disassemble and repair the damaged structural unit, which facilitates the repair and maintenance of the speaker 100 during use.
由于引导体132可以包含更多的连接面,通过这些更多的连接面来实现引导体132与扬声器100的其他部位的连接,可以提高连接的可靠性。因而,设置引导体132用于引导波束产生模组140产生的波束,可以提高扬声器100结构与性能的稳定性。Since the guide body 132 can include more connection surfaces, the guide body 132 can be connected to other parts of the speaker 100 through these more connection surfaces, which can improve the reliability of the connection. Therefore, the guide body 132 is provided to guide the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, which can improve the stability of the structure and performance of the speaker 100.
上述关于引导体132的描述仅以扬声器100中包含一个引导体132为例进行了介绍,对于扬声器100中包含多个引导体132,或者扬声器100中的引导体132为环形形状的情况,前述关于引导体132的相关描述同样适用,为了简洁,这里不做赘述。The above description about the guide body 132 is only introduced based on the example that the speaker 100 includes one guide body 132. For the case where the speaker 100 includes multiple guide bodies 132, or the guide body 132 in the speaker 100 is annular in shape, the above description about the guide body 132 is also applicable. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
在又一些实施例中,通过对扬声器100波束产生模组140包含的波束产生单元的结构进行调整也可以达到调整波束传播路径和/或波束传播方向的目的。或者说,引导结构130的功能也可以设置在波束产生模组140上。例如,该引导结构130可以为一个或多个附加辐射面134,该附加辐射面134可以与波束产生模组140的振膜141之间连接,附加辐射面134的设置一方面可以对振膜141的不同区域产生的子波束进行汇聚,另一方面,也可以调整振膜141产生的子波束的传播方向。In some other embodiments, the purpose of adjusting the beam propagation path and/or the beam propagation direction can also be achieved by adjusting the structure of the beam generating unit included in the beam generating module 140 of the speaker 100. In other words, the function of the guide structure 130 can also be set on the beam generating module 140. For example, the guide structure 130 can be one or more additional radiation surfaces 134, and the additional radiation surface 134 can be connected to the diaphragm 141 of the beam generating module 140. The setting of the additional radiation surface 134 can, on the one hand, converge the sub-beams generated by different areas of the diaphragm 141, and on the other hand, can also adjust the propagation direction of the sub-beams generated by the diaphragm 141.
例如,如图33所示为又一引导结构130的剖面视图,扬声器100内腔设置有一个引导结构130,该引导结构130为一个附加辐射面134A,该附加辐射面134A通过连接件135A与波束产生模组140的振膜141A固定连接。For example, as shown in FIG33 , which is a cross-sectional view of another guiding structure 130 , a guiding structure 130 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 . The guiding structure 130 is an additional radiating surface 134A, and the additional radiating surface 134A is fixedly connected to the diaphragm 141A of the beam generating module 140 through a connecting member 135A.
又例如,如图34所示为又一引导结构130的剖面视图,扬声器100内腔设置有波束产生模组140,该波束产生模组140包括多个波束产生单元,该引导结构130可以为多个附加辐射面134B,该附加辐射面134B可以通过连接件135B与波束产生单元的振膜141B固定连接。For another example, as shown in Figure 34, which is a cross-sectional view of another guiding structure 130, a beam generating module 140 is disposed in the inner cavity of the speaker 100. The beam generating module 140 includes a plurality of beam generating units. The guiding structure 130 may be a plurality of additional radiating surfaces 134B, and the additional radiating surfaces 134B may be fixedly connected to the diaphragm 141B of the beam generating unit via a connecting member 135B.
在波束产生模组140的振膜141在控制信号的作用下进行振动时,振膜141产生的振动可以通过连接件135传递至附加辐射面134,从而与振膜141连接的附加辐射面134可以与振膜141产生相同或相似的振动,从而使附加辐射面134也可以产生第一波束。When the diaphragm 141 of the beam generating module 140 vibrates under the action of the control signal, the vibration generated by the diaphragm 141 can be transmitted to the additional radiation surface 134 through the connecting member 135, so that the additional radiation surface 134 connected to the diaphragm 141 can generate the same or similar vibration as the diaphragm 141, so that the additional radiation surface 134 can also generate a first beam.
附加辐射面134可以具备多种不同的形状,也可以由不同的材料制成。附加辐射面134可以用于将波束产生模组140产生的波束向通道121附近汇聚,从而可以提高扬声器100在阀门120开启的情况下,波束产生模组140产生的波束的声压透射率。The additional radiation surface 134 can have a variety of different shapes and can also be made of different materials. The additional radiation surface 134 can be used to converge the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 toward the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby improving the sound pressure transmittance of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 when the valve 120 of the speaker 100 is opened.
在一些示例中,附加辐射面134可以为包含曲面的结构体,例如,弧形槽体结构、倒置的鞋面结构等。包含曲面的结构体的曲面的曲率可以相同也可以不同。该包含曲面的结构体的曲面的开口方向可以朝向阀门120的方向。在多个波束产生模组140上设置附加辐射面134的情况下,多个附加辐射面134的开口方向可以不同。例如,当阀门120上开设一个通孔时,多个附加辐射面134的开口方向可以均朝向阀门120上的通道。In some examples, the additional radiation surface 134 may be a structure including a curved surface, such as an arc-shaped trough structure, an inverted upper structure, etc. The curvature of the curved surface of the structure including the curved surface may be the same or different. The opening direction of the curved surface of the structure including the curved surface may be toward the direction of the valve 120. In the case where the additional radiation surfaces 134 are provided on multiple beam generating modules 140, the opening directions of the multiple additional radiation surfaces 134 may be different. For example, when a through hole is provided on the valve 120, the opening directions of the multiple additional radiation surfaces 134 may all be toward the channel on the valve 120.
多个附加辐射面134的数量与波束产生模组140包含的波束产生单元的数量可以相同也可以不同。也就是说,附加辐射面134可以设置在每一个波束产生单元上,也可以设置在部分波束产生单元上。The number of the plurality of additional radiation surfaces 134 may be the same as or different from the number of beam generating units included in the beam generating module 140. In other words, the additional radiation surface 134 may be provided on each beam generating unit or on some of the beam generating units.
通过在波束产生单元上设置不同形状、不同朝向的附加辐射面以实现对波束产生模组140产生波束的传播方向的引导,可以提高引导结构对于波束方向引导的分辨率,即提高波束方向引导的精度,有利于进一步将波束产生模组140产生的波束产生的波束汇聚到通道121附近,进一步提高扬声器100阀门开启状态的声压的透射率。By arranging additional radiating surfaces of different shapes and orientations on the beam generating unit to guide the propagation direction of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, the resolution of the guiding structure for beam direction guidance can be improved, that is, the accuracy of beam direction guidance can be improved, which is beneficial to further converge the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 to the vicinity of the channel 121, thereby further improving the transmittance of the sound pressure in the valve opening state of the speaker 100.
请参考图23,引导结构130对波束的引导可以通过改变波束产生模组140的振膜的形状实现,或者说,波束产生模组140的振膜可以设置不同的形状以实现对于波束产生模组140产生的波束传播方向的引导,即调整波束的传播方向使其向通道121附近汇聚。Please refer to Figure 23. The guidance of the beam by the guiding structure 130 can be achieved by changing the shape of the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140. In other words, the diaphragm of the beam generating module 140 can be set to different shapes to achieve the guidance of the propagation direction of the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, that is, adjusting the propagation direction of the beam to converge near the channel 121.
示例性的,多个波束产生单元的振膜可以为弧形,弧形的开口方向可以均朝向通道121。在通道121为单缝开口的情况下,同一列(X轴方向)不同行的波束产生单元的振膜弧形开口方向可以朝向通道121附近(如图23所示),同一行(Y轴方向)的波束产生单元的振膜弧形开口方向可以相同。在通道121为单孔开口的情况下,同一列(X轴方向)不同行的波束产生单元的振膜弧形开口方向可以 朝向通道121附近(如图23所示),同一行(Y轴方向)不同列的波束产生单元的振膜弧形开口方向可以不同,不同列的波束产生单元的振膜弧形开口方向可以均朝向通道121。Exemplarily, the diaphragms of the plurality of beam generating units may be arc-shaped, and the opening directions of the arcs may all be toward the channel 121. In the case where the channel 121 is a single-slit opening, the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different rows of the same column (X-axis direction) may be toward the vicinity of the channel 121 (as shown in FIG. 23 ), and the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in the same row (Y-axis direction) may be the same. In the case where the channel 121 is a single-slit opening, the arc-shaped opening directions of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different rows of the same column (X-axis direction) may be Towards the vicinity of the channel 121 (as shown in FIG. 23 ), the directions of the arc-shaped openings of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different columns in the same row (Y-axis direction) may be different, and the directions of the arc-shaped openings of the diaphragms of the beam generating units in different columns may all be toward the channel 121 .
直接通过调整波束产生单元的振膜的形状,来实现对于不同波束传播方向的调整,以汇聚多个波束产生单元产生的波束之通道121附近,可以降低扬声器100内腔结构的复杂程度,可以简化引导结构130,有利于扬声器100后期使用过程中的拆卸和维修。By directly adjusting the shape of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit, adjustment of different beam propagation directions can be achieved to converge the beams generated by multiple beam generating units near the channel 121. This can reduce the complexity of the inner cavity structure of the speaker 100 and simplify the guide structure 130, which is beneficial for the disassembly and maintenance of the speaker 100 during later use.
在又一些实施例中,引导结构130还可以设置更多不同结构来实现对于波束产生单元产生的波束传播路径的调整。In some other embodiments, the guiding structure 130 may be provided with more different structures to adjust the propagation path of the beam generated by the beam generating unit.
图35示出了又一种引导结构130的横截面示意图,该引导结构130可以设置在阀门120和波束产生单元之间,并位于扬声器100的内腔,图36为包含有该引导结构130的扬声器100的截面示意图。FIG35 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 , which may be disposed between the valve 120 and the beam generating unit and located in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 . FIG36 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 including the guide structure 130 .
在一些示例中,引导结构130可以视为一种超材料结构,该引导结构130可以由多种直径不同的球体或者圆柱体组成,多个球体可以在图35中的Y轴方向上连续分布,或者该多个圆柱体可以在图35中的Y轴方向上延伸。例如,引导结构130可以包括第一柱体136A、第二柱体136B和第三柱体136C,其中,第一柱体136A的直径大于第二柱体136B的直径,第二柱体136B的直径大于第三柱体136C的直径。在引导结构130中,第一柱体136A的数量可以小于第二柱体136B的数量,第二柱体136B的数量可以小于第三柱体136C的数量。三类柱体之间的间距可以满足如下关系:第一柱体136A可以与第二柱体136B和/或第三柱体136C相邻,相邻第一柱体136A之间的间距大于相邻第二柱体136B的间距,相邻第二柱体136B之间的间距大于相邻第三柱体136C的间距。In some examples, the guide structure 130 can be regarded as a metamaterial structure, and the guide structure 130 can be composed of a plurality of spheres or cylinders with different diameters, and the plurality of spheres can be continuously distributed in the Y-axis direction in FIG. 35 , or the plurality of cylinders can extend in the Y-axis direction in FIG. 35 . For example, the guide structure 130 can include a first cylinder 136A, a second cylinder 136B, and a third cylinder 136C, wherein the diameter of the first cylinder 136A is greater than the diameter of the second cylinder 136B, and the diameter of the second cylinder 136B is greater than the diameter of the third cylinder 136C. In the guide structure 130, the number of the first cylinder 136A can be less than the number of the second cylinder 136B, and the number of the second cylinder 136B can be less than the number of the third cylinder 136C. The spacing between the three types of columns can satisfy the following relationship: the first column 136A can be adjacent to the second column 136B and/or the third column 136C, the spacing between adjacent first columns 136A is greater than the spacing between adjacent second columns 136B, and the spacing between adjacent second columns 136B is greater than the spacing between adjacent third columns 136C.
上述多个柱体之间的间隙可以形成波束传播的通道或通路。波束产生单元产生的波束在第一柱体136A附近的通道之间传播的路径、波束在第二柱体136B附近的通道之间传播的路径以及波束在第三柱体136C附近的通道之间的传播的路径,三者之间可以不同。The gaps between the plurality of cylinders may form channels or paths for beam propagation. The paths for the beam generated by the beam generating unit to propagate between the channels near the first cylinder 136A, the paths for the beam to propagate between the channels near the second cylinder 136B, and the paths for the beam to propagate between the channels near the third cylinder 136C may be different.
引导结构130可以通过其包含的结构单元的端面或者侧壁与扬声器100的内壁相连,从而使得引导结构130可以固定在扬声器100的腔体内。例如,图35所示的引导结构130,在其包含的结构单元136A、136B和136C等为圆柱体的情况下,圆柱体的轴向为Y轴的方向,圆柱体的两端端面可以与扬声器100的内壁固定连接。The guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 through the end faces or side walls of the structural units included therein, so that the guide structure 130 can be fixed in the cavity of the speaker 100. For example, in the guide structure 130 shown in FIG35 , when the structural units 136A, 136B, and 136C included therein are cylinders, the axial direction of the cylinder is the direction of the Y axis, and the end faces of both ends of the cylinder can be fixedly connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100.
图37示出了又一种引导结构130的横截面示意图,该引导结构130可以设置在阀门120和波束产生单元之间,并位于扬声器100的内腔,图38为包含有该引导结构130的扬声器100的截面示意图。FIG37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of another guide structure 130 , which may be disposed between the valve 120 and the beam generating unit and located in the inner cavity of the speaker 100 . FIG38 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the speaker 100 including the guide structure 130 .
该引导结构130同样也可以视为一种超材料结构,该引导结构130可以由多种不同形状和/或尺寸的结构单元组成。例如,引导结构130可以包括第一结构单元137A、第二结构单元137B、第三结构单元137C和第四结构单元137D组成。其中,第一结构单元137A、第二结构单元137B和第三结构单元137C均为“倒F”状,第四结构单元137D为“土”状。四种结构单元在X轴方向的尺寸可以相同也可以不同,四种结构单元在Z轴方向的尺寸也可以相同或中不同。具体的,可以通过调整不同结构单元中部件的尺寸来获取不同尺寸的结构单元。例如,可以调整结构单元的第一子部件的高度f4和/或第二子部件的宽度f2。The guiding structure 130 can also be regarded as a metamaterial structure, and the guiding structure 130 can be composed of structural units of various shapes and/or sizes. For example, the guiding structure 130 may include a first structural unit 137A, a second structural unit 137B, a third structural unit 137C and a fourth structural unit 137D. Among them, the first structural unit 137A, the second structural unit 137B and the third structural unit 137C are all in the shape of an "inverted F", and the fourth structural unit 137D is in the shape of a "soil". The dimensions of the four structural units in the X-axis direction may be the same or different, and the dimensions of the four structural units in the Z-axis direction may also be the same or different. Specifically, structural units of different sizes can be obtained by adjusting the dimensions of components in different structural units. For example, the height f4 of the first subcomponent and/or the width f2 of the second subcomponent of the structural unit can be adjusted.
相邻两个结构单元之间的间隙可以构成波束的传播通道(通路)。不同的传播通道的长度可以不同,通过调整传播通道的长度即可以调整波束在传播通道中传播的路径的长短。在一种可能的实现方式中,可以通过调整两个结构单元之间沿X轴方向的间距f1来调整前述两个结构单元之间的波束传播通道的长度。在另一种可能的实现方式中,可以通过调整两个结构单元之间沿Z轴方向的间距f3来调整前述两个结构单元之间的波束传播通道的长度。在又一种可能的实现方式中,可以同时调整两个结构单元之间在X轴方向和Z轴方向上的间距,来达到调整波束传播通道长度的目的。The gap between two adjacent structural units can constitute a propagation channel (path) for the beam. The lengths of different propagation channels can be different. By adjusting the length of the propagation channel, the length of the path along which the beam propagates in the propagation channel can be adjusted. In one possible implementation, the length of the beam propagation channel between the two structural units can be adjusted by adjusting the spacing f1 between the two structural units along the X-axis direction. In another possible implementation, the length of the beam propagation channel between the two structural units can be adjusted by adjusting the spacing f3 between the two structural units along the Z-axis direction. In yet another possible implementation, the spacing between the two structural units in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction can be adjusted simultaneously to achieve the purpose of adjusting the length of the beam propagation channel.
引导结构130可以通过其包含的结构单元的端面或者侧壁与扬声器100的内壁相连,从而使得引导结构130可以固定在扬声器100的腔体内。图37所示的引导结构130,其包含的结构单元136A、136B和136C等在Y轴方向上的端面可以与扬声器100的内壁连接,或者,引导结构130两侧(X轴方向)的两个结构单元的暴露面可以作为连接面与扬声器100的内壁连接。在波束产生模组140与阀门120之间设置引导结构130,波束产生模组140产生的波束可以通过引导结构130内部进而传播至阀门120上设置的通道121附近。设置不同形状、不同大小、不同分布方式的结构单元组成的引导结构130,即利用组成引导结构130的多个结构单元之间形成的间隙用作波束传播通道,不同的传播通道对应着不同的波束传播路径。波束传播路径的路径长短可以不同,波束传播路径的方向也可以不同。 The guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 through the end face or side wall of the structural unit included therein, so that the guide structure 130 can be fixed in the cavity of the speaker 100. The end faces of the structural units 136A, 136B and 136C included in the guide structure 130 shown in FIG37 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 in the Y-axis direction, or the exposed surfaces of the two structural units on both sides (X-axis direction) of the guide structure 130 can be connected to the inner wall of the speaker 100 as connecting surfaces. The guide structure 130 is arranged between the beam generating module 140 and the valve 120, and the beam generated by the beam generating module 140 can be propagated through the inside of the guide structure 130 to the vicinity of the channel 121 arranged on the valve 120. The guide structure 130 composed of structural units of different shapes, sizes and distribution methods is arranged, that is, the gaps formed between the multiple structural units constituting the guide structure 130 are used as beam propagation channels, and different propagation channels correspond to different beam propagation paths. The path lengths of the beam propagation paths may be different, and the directions of the beam propagation paths may also be different.
调整组成引导结构130包含的结构单元的形状、数量、分布等,实现对于波束传播路径的调整,进而可以实现波束传播至阀门120附近的相位、方向等的调整,从而有利于调整阀门120开启状态下波束对应的声压的透射率,有利于提升扬声器100对波束产生模组140产生的波束的调制效果,有利于提高扬声器100输出的可听声的质量。By adjusting the shape, number, distribution, etc. of the structural units included in the guiding structure 130, the beam propagation path can be adjusted, and then the phase, direction, etc. of the beam propagation near the valve 120 can be adjusted, which is beneficial to adjust the transmittance of the sound pressure corresponding to the beam when the valve 120 is open, and is beneficial to improving the modulation effect of the speaker 100 on the beam generated by the beam generating module 140, and is beneficial to improving the quality of the audible sound output by the speaker 100.
引导结构设置在第一波束传播至通道的路径上,通过引导结构可以调整第一波束的传播路径,从而使得第一波束朝向通道处汇聚,以使得更多的波束、波束更高的能量能够在通道处汇聚,以使得调制前的波束的声压升高,扬声器输出的目标波束的声压也可以得到一定程度的升高,从而有利于提高扬声器对于可听声尤其是低频可听声的表现能力。The guiding structure is arranged on the path of the first beam propagating to the channel. The guiding structure can adjust the propagation path of the first beam so that the first beam converges toward the channel, so that more beams and beams with higher energy can converge at the channel, so that the sound pressure of the beam before modulation is increased, and the sound pressure of the target beam output by the loudspeaker can also be increased to a certain extent, which is beneficial to improving the speaker's performance ability for audible sound, especially low-frequency audible sound.
通过对软件模拟可以确定扬声器100在改进前后输出的可听声的声压强度透射率的差异。The difference in the sound pressure intensity transmittance of the audible sound output by the speaker 100 before and after the improvement can be determined by software simulation.
对于对称阀门,根据软件模拟结果,相对于不设置附加辐射面的情况,设置附加辐射面的扬声器100,其声压透射率提升大约在200-400倍。对于非对称阀门,根据软件模拟结果,相对于不设置附加辐射面的情况,设置附加辐射面的扬声器100,其声压透射率提升大约在50-500倍。For a symmetrical valve, according to software simulation results, the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the additional radiation surface is increased by about 200-400 times compared to the case where no additional radiation surface is provided. For an asymmetrical valve, according to software simulation results, the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the additional radiation surface is increased by about 50-500 times compared to the case where no additional radiation surface is provided.
对于对称阀门,根据软件模拟结果,相对于不设置引导面131的情况,设置引导面131的扬声器100,其声压透射率提升大约在20-100倍。对于非对称阀门,根据软件模拟结果,相对于不设置引导面131的情况,设置引导面131的扬声器100,其声压透射率提升大约在10-80倍。For a symmetrical valve, according to software simulation results, the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the guide surface 131 is increased by about 20-100 times compared with the case where the guide surface 131 is not provided. For an asymmetrical valve, according to software simulation results, the sound pressure transmittance of the speaker 100 with the guide surface 131 is increased by about 10-80 times compared with the case where the guide surface 131 is not provided.
需要说明的是,以上仅示例性的提供了本申请实施例中部分实施例的模拟结果,其他实施例可以得到类似的结果,为了简洁,此处不再一一介绍。It should be noted that the above only provides exemplary simulation results of some embodiments of the present application, and similar results can be obtained in other embodiments. For the sake of brevity, they will not be introduced one by one here.
还需要说明的是,上述软件模拟结果只是用于说明在对扬声器100改进前后的声压透射率的变化情况,不应理解为不同类型的阀门之间改进结果的差异。It should also be noted that the above software simulation results are only used to illustrate the changes in sound pressure transmittance before and after the speaker 100 is improved, and should not be understood as the difference in improvement results between different types of valves.
上述实施例中提供了多种通过调整扬声器内部的结构来实现提升扬声器输出的可听声的质量的方法,这些调整方案本身可以是相互耦合的,也可使是相互独立而能够相互结合同时使用的。并且,相对于只采用多种方案中的一种方案,同时利用多种方案可以取得更好的调整结果,使得扬声器输出质量更好的可听声。The above embodiments provide a variety of methods for improving the quality of audible sound output by the speaker by adjusting the internal structure of the speaker. These adjustment schemes can be coupled to each other or can be independent of each other and can be used in combination with each other. Moreover, compared with using only one of the multiple schemes, using multiple schemes at the same time can achieve better adjustment results, so that the speaker can output audible sound of better quality.
例如,可以同时调整波束产生单元的控制信号、波束产生单元的排布方式、波束产生单元的振膜大小,来调整多个波束产生单元产生波束的相位差与波束的振幅,以使得第一波束传播朝向通道处汇聚,从而达到提高扬声器输出声压的目的。For example, the control signal of the beam generating unit, the arrangement of the beam generating unit, and the size of the diaphragm of the beam generating unit can be adjusted simultaneously to adjust the phase difference and amplitude of the beams generated by multiple beam generating units, so that the first beam propagation converges toward the channel, thereby achieving the purpose of increasing the output sound pressure of the speaker.
基于相同的构思,如图39所示,本申请还提供了一种发声装置200,该发声装置200可以用于实现前述扬声器100的功能。该发声装置200可以包括波束生成模块210、波束调制模块220第一控制模块231和第二控制模块232,在一些示例中,该发声装置200还可以包括波束引导模块240,该发声装置200可以利用前述功能模块中的一个或多个输出可听声。Based on the same concept, as shown in FIG39 , the present application also provides a sound-generating device 200, which can be used to implement the functions of the aforementioned speaker 100. The sound-generating device 200 may include a beam forming module 210, a beam modulating module 220, a first control module 231, and a second control module 232. In some examples, the sound-generating device 200 may also include a beam steering module 240. The sound-generating device 200 may output audible sound using one or more of the aforementioned functional modules.
在一些示例中,发声装置200可以接收外部发送给发声装置200的第一信息201,该第一信息201可以为声源信息,该第一信息201可以包含目标波束205的相关信息,例如,第一信息201可以包括目标波束205信号205的频率信息和/或声压信息等。利用该第一信息201,发声装置200可以输出目标波束205。这里目标波束205可以是前述扬声器100输出的第二波束。In some examples, the sound-emitting device 200 may receive first information 201 sent to the sound-emitting device 200 from an external source. The first information 201 may be sound source information. The first information 201 may include relevant information of the target beam 205. For example, the first information 201 may include frequency information and/or sound pressure information of the target beam 205 signal 205. Using the first information 201, the sound-emitting device 200 may output the target beam 205. Here, the target beam 205 may be the second beam output by the aforementioned speaker 100.
在一个示例中,发声装置200的第一控制模块231接收第一信息201,并根据第一信息201生成用于控制波束生成模块210的第一控制信号202,该第一控制信号202可以为前述实施例中,用于控制振膜振动的电压信号或电磁信号等。波束生成模块210根据第一控制信号202生成初始波束,该初始波束可以为前述实施例中波束产生模组140发出的第一波束或波束产生单元产生的第一波束的子波束。发生装置200的第二控制模块232可以用于向波束调制模块220发送第二控制信号204,初始波束可以传播至波束调制模块220,波束调制模块220根据第二控制信号204对接收的初始波束进行调制,从而可以使得发声装置200输出目标波束205。In one example, the first control module 231 of the sound-generating device 200 receives the first information 201, and generates a first control signal 202 for controlling the beam forming module 210 according to the first information 201. The first control signal 202 may be a voltage signal or an electromagnetic signal, etc., for controlling the vibration of the diaphragm in the aforementioned embodiment. The beam forming module 210 generates an initial beam according to the first control signal 202. The initial beam may be a sub-beam of the first beam emitted by the beam generating module 140 or the first beam generated by the beam generating unit in the aforementioned embodiment. The second control module 232 of the sound-generating device 200 may be used to send a second control signal 204 to the beam modulating module 220. The initial beam may be propagated to the beam modulating module 220. The beam modulating module 220 modulates the received initial beam according to the second control signal 204, so that the sound-generating device 200 may output a target beam 205.
在另一些示例中,发声装置200可以将目标波束205的相关信息(例如目标波束205的频率信息和/或声压信息)保存在发声装置200本地的存储介质上,当需要输出目标波束205时,发声装置200的第一控制模块231可以从本地存储介质上读取前述目标波束205的相关信息,并根据目标波束205的相关信息生成用于控制波束生成模块210的第一控制信号202。In other examples, the sound emitting device 200 may store relevant information of the target beam 205 (e.g., frequency information and/or sound pressure information of the target beam 205) on a local storage medium of the sound emitting device 200. When the target beam 205 needs to be output, the first control module 231 of the sound emitting device 200 may read the relevant information of the aforementioned target beam 205 from the local storage medium, and generate a first control signal 202 for controlling the beam generating module 210 based on the relevant information of the target beam 205.
第一控制模块231和第二控制模块232之间可以设置有通信链路203,该通信链路203可以用于第一控制模块231和第二控制模块232之间交换信息。 A communication link 203 may be provided between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 , and the communication link 203 may be used to exchange information between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 .
示例性的,第一控制模块231可以将用于控制波束生成模块210的第一控制信号202的相关信息和第一控制模块231接收的第一信息201发送至第二控制模块232,从而有利于第二控制模块232确定控制波束调制模块220的第二控制信号204。Exemplarily, the first control module 231 can send relevant information of the first control signal 202 for controlling the beam forming module 210 and the first information 201 received by the first control module 231 to the second control module 232, thereby facilitating the second control module 232 to determine the second control signal 204 for controlling the beam modulation module 220.
同样示例性的,第二控制模块232也可以将第二控制信号204相关的信息和发声装置200输出的目标波束205的相关信息发送至第一控制模块231,该第二控制信号204相关的信息可以作为反馈信息,第一控制模块231可以利用该反馈信息进一步调整下一周期中第一控制信号202。通过第一控制模块231和第二控制模块232之间的信息交互、协同作用,有利于提高发声装置200输出的目标波束205的质量。Similarly, the second control module 232 can also send information related to the second control signal 204 and related information of the target beam 205 output by the sound-generating device 200 to the first control module 231. The information related to the second control signal 204 can be used as feedback information, and the first control module 231 can use the feedback information to further adjust the first control signal 202 in the next cycle. The information interaction and synergy between the first control module 231 and the second control module 232 are conducive to improving the quality of the target beam 205 output by the sound-generating device 200.
一种可能的实现方式是,当发声装置200输出的目标波束205的频率较低时,第二控制模块可以将目标波束205的频率信息和第二控制信号204中包含的调制方式发送至第一控制模块231,该第一控制模块231在接收到这些信息时可以调整第一控制信号202,例如提高第一控制信号202对应的电压的强度,从而,增大波束产生模块210产生的波束的频率,从而有利于增大下一次调制过程中发声装置200输出的目标波束205的频率。One possible implementation method is that when the frequency of the target beam 205 output by the sound-emitting device 200 is low, the second control module can send the frequency information of the target beam 205 and the modulation method contained in the second control signal 204 to the first control module 231. When receiving this information, the first control module 231 can adjust the first control signal 202, for example, increase the intensity of the voltage corresponding to the first control signal 202, thereby increasing the frequency of the beam generated by the beam generating module 210, which is beneficial to increase the frequency of the target beam 205 output by the sound-emitting device 200 in the next modulation process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一控制模块231功能和第二控制模块232的功能可以分别通过一个独立的物理电路或者处理芯片实现,两个物理电路或者两个处理芯片之间可以设置有通信链路。In a possible implementation, the functions of the first control module 231 and the functions of the second control module 232 may be implemented by an independent physical circuit or a processing chip respectively, and a communication link may be provided between the two physical circuits or the two processing chips.
这里第一控制模块231可以视为用于控制前述实施例中波束产生模组140的控制模块,第二控制模块232可以视为用于控制前述是示例中阀门120的控制模块。Here, the first control module 231 can be regarded as a control module for controlling the beam generating module 140 in the aforementioned embodiment, and the second control module 232 can be regarded as a control module for controlling the valve 120 in the aforementioned example.
在一些实施例中,发声装置200还可以包括波束引导模块240,该波束引导模块240可以接收波束生成模块210产生的初始波束,并对初始波束的传播路径等进行调整,调整后的初始波束可以传播至波束调制模块220。示例性的,波束引导模块240可以通过改变两个同步(同一时间的相位相同)的初始波束传播至波束调制模块220的传播路径,从而使得两个初始波束到达波束调制模块220的相位产生四分之一个周期的相位差。In some embodiments, the sound generating device 200 may further include a beam steering module 240, which may receive the initial beam generated by the beam generating module 210 and adjust the propagation path of the initial beam, etc. The adjusted initial beam may be propagated to the beam modulation module 220. Exemplarily, the beam steering module 240 may change the propagation path of two synchronized (same phase at the same time) initial beams propagated to the beam modulation module 220, so that the phases of the two initial beams arriving at the beam modulation module 220 have a phase difference of one quarter of a cycle.
一种可能的实现方式是,波束引导模块240可以设置于波束生成模块210和波束调制模块220之间。波束生成模块210产生的初始波束的部分或全部可以通过波束引导模块240,并传播至波束调制模块220处进行调制,从而使得发声装置200输出可听声205。In one possible implementation, the beam steering module 240 may be disposed between the beam forming module 210 and the beam modulating module 220. Part or all of the initial beam generated by the beam forming module 210 may pass through the beam steering module 240 and propagate to the beam modulating module 220 for modulation, so that the sound generating device 200 outputs the audible sound 205.
发声装置200可以包含不同的波束引导模块240,不同波束引导模块240的结构、功能等不同,例如,该波束引导模块240的功能可以通过前述实施例中附加辐射面、曲面振膜、引导面、引导体等中的一种或多种实现。The sound-emitting device 200 may include different beam guiding modules 240, and the structures and functions of different beam guiding modules 240 are different. For example, the function of the beam guiding module 240 may be realized by one or more of the additional radiation surface, curved diaphragm, guiding surface, guiding body, etc. in the aforementioned embodiments.
上述发声装置200可以包括一个或多个波束生成模块210、一个或多个波束调制模块220以及一个或多个波束引导模块240。波束生成模块210中也可以包括一个或多个波束生成单元,波束调制模块220也可以包括一个或多个信号调制单元,波束引导模块240也可以包括一个或多个引导单元。不同信号生成单元可以产生不同频率、不同振幅、不同传播方向的初始波束,同一个信号生成单元在不同时间产生的初始波束也可以不同。不同引导单元对于初始波束的传播路径的调整作用也可以不同,不同波束调制模块对于波束的调制作用可以不同。The above-mentioned sound-generating device 200 may include one or more beam forming modules 210, one or more beam modulation modules 220 and one or more beam steering modules 240. The beam forming module 210 may also include one or more beam forming units, the beam modulation module 220 may also include one or more signal modulation units, and the beam steering module 240 may also include one or more steering units. Different signal generating units may generate initial beams of different frequencies, different amplitudes, and different propagation directions, and the same signal generating unit may generate different initial beams at different times. Different steering units may have different adjustment effects on the propagation path of the initial beam, and different beam modulation modules may have different modulation effects on the beam.
不同的信号生成单元可以产生不同的初始波束,即前述初始波束可以包含一种或多种波束。发声装置200可以通过对这些多种波束进行处理以提高发声装置200输出的目标波束205的效果。Different signal generating units may generate different initial beams, that is, the initial beam may include one or more beams. The sound generating device 200 may process these multiple beams to improve the effect of the target beam 205 output by the sound generating device 200.
初始波束可以为脉冲信号,或者该初始波束也可以为声波信号。初始波束的频率可以大于目标波束信号205的频率。示例性的,该初始波束可以是超声信号,该初始波束的频率大于20kHz。或者,该初始波束可以是可听声,该初始波束的频率小于或等于20kHz。The initial beam may be a pulse signal, or the initial beam may be a sonic wave signal. The frequency of the initial beam may be greater than the frequency of the target beam signal 205. Exemplarily, the initial beam may be an ultrasonic signal, and the frequency of the initial beam may be greater than 20 kHz. Alternatively, the initial beam may be an audible sound, and the frequency of the initial beam may be less than or equal to 20 kHz.
发声装置200可以通过上述第一控制模块231、第二控制模块232、波束生成模块210、波束调制模块220和波束引导模块230中的一个或多个模块输出目标波束205,通过调整上述模块中的一个或多个的功能均可以实现对最终输出的目标波束205的调整。The sound-emitting device 200 can output the target beam 205 through one or more modules among the first control module 231, the second control module 232, the beam generating module 210, the beam modulating module 220 and the beam guiding module 230. The target beam 205 outputted finally can be adjusted by adjusting the functions of one or more of the above modules.
具体而言,调整第一控制模块231可以改变该模块输出的用于控制波束生成模块210的信号,从而影响初始波束的生成;调整第二控制模块232可以改变该模块输出的用于控制波束调制模块220的信号,从而影响波束调制模块220对于初始波束的调节方式;调整波束生成模块210中包含的用于生成波束的物理结构等可以改变该模块生成的初始波束的频率、相位、振幅、传播方向、传播路径等,从而影响目标波束205的生成效果;调整波束调制模块220中包含的用于调制初始波束的物理结构等可 以改变对初始波束的调制方式,从而影响目标波束205的生成效果;调整波束引导模块240则可以在一定程度上改变初始波束的传播路径、传播方向、相位等,从而也会对最终目标波束的输出效果产生影响。在实际使用过程中,可以对上述模块中的一种或多种进行调整,以使得发声装置200可以输出目标波束。Specifically, adjusting the first control module 231 can change the signal output by the module for controlling the beam forming module 210, thereby affecting the generation of the initial beam; adjusting the second control module 232 can change the signal output by the module for controlling the beam modulation module 220, thereby affecting the adjustment method of the beam modulation module 220 for the initial beam; adjusting the physical structure for generating the beam contained in the beam forming module 210 can change the frequency, phase, amplitude, propagation direction, propagation path, etc. of the initial beam generated by the module, thereby affecting the generation effect of the target beam 205; adjusting the physical structure for modulating the initial beam contained in the beam modulation module 220 can change the frequency, phase, amplitude, propagation direction, propagation path, etc. of the initial beam generated by the module, thereby affecting the generation effect of the target beam 205. The modulation mode of the initial beam is changed to affect the generation effect of the target beam 205; the adjustment beam steering module 240 can change the propagation path, propagation direction, phase, etc. of the initial beam to a certain extent, thereby also affecting the output effect of the final target beam. In actual use, one or more of the above modules can be adjusted so that the sound device 200 can output the target beam.
需要说明的是,图39中所示的关于发声装置200的功能架构不应理解为对于发声装置200的物理结构的限定,也就是说,发声装置200的同一个功能模块可以由一个或多个物理结构实现,发声装置200包含的同一个物理结构也可以用于实现不同的功能模块,发声装置200的多个物理结构之间可以是相互独立的,也可以是在功能上相互耦合的。It should be noted that the functional architecture of the sound-emitting device 200 shown in FIG39 should not be understood as a limitation on the physical structure of the sound-emitting device 200. That is to say, the same functional module of the sound-emitting device 200 can be implemented by one or more physical structures, and the same physical structure contained in the sound-emitting device 200 can also be used to implement different functional modules. The multiple physical structures of the sound-emitting device 200 can be independent of each other or functionally coupled to each other.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内;在不冲突的情况下,本申请的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any technician familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application; in the absence of conflict, the embodiments of the present application and the features in the embodiments can be combined with each other. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application shall be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (19)

  1. 一种扬声器(100),其特征在于,包括:A loudspeaker (100), characterized by comprising:
    壳体(110);Housing (110);
    阀门(120),所述阀门(120)与所述壳体(110)围成腔体(150),所述阀门(120)开设有通道(121);A valve (120), wherein the valve (120) and the housing (110) enclose a cavity (150), and the valve (120) is provided with a channel (121);
    波束产生模组(140),所述波束产生模组(140)位于所述腔体(150)内,所述波束产生模组(140)用于产生第一波束;A beam generating module (140), the beam generating module (140) being located in the cavity (150), and the beam generating module (140) being used to generate a first beam;
    引导结构(130),所述引导结构(130)位于所述阀门(120)和所述波束产生模组(140)之间;A guide structure (130), the guide structure (130) being located between the valve (120) and the beam generating module (140);
    其中,所述阀门(120)被配置为打开所述通道(121)或关闭所述通道(121)来调制所述第一波束,所述第一波束中的至少部分波束通过所述通道(121)传播至所述腔体(150)外形成第二波束。The valve (120) is configured to open the channel (121) or close the channel (121) to modulate the first beam, and at least part of the first beam propagates through the channel (121) to the outside of the cavity (150) to form a second beam.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括振膜(141),所述引导结构(130)包括第一引导结构,所述第一引导结构包括附加辐射面(134),所述附加辐射面(134)与所述振膜(141)连接。The loudspeaker (100) according to claim 1 is characterized in that the beam generating module (140) includes a diaphragm (141), the guiding structure (130) includes a first guiding structure, the first guiding structure includes an additional radiating surface (134), and the additional radiating surface (134) is connected to the diaphragm (141).
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述附加辐射面(134)包括至少一个第一曲面,所述至少一个第一曲面的开口朝向所述通道(121)。The loudspeaker (100) according to claim 2 is characterized in that the additional radiation surface (134) comprises at least one first curved surface, and an opening of the at least one first curved surface faces the channel (121).
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述引导结构(130)包括第二引导结构,所述第二引导结构包括引导面(131),所述引导面(131)位于所述通道(121)与所述壳体(110)的侧壁(111)之间;The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that the guide structure (130) comprises a second guide structure, the second guide structure comprises a guide surface (131), and the guide surface (131) is located between the channel (121) and the side wall (111) of the housing (110);
    从所述引导面(131)靠近所述侧壁(111)的一边至所述引导面(131)靠近所述通道(121)的另一边,所述引导面(131)与所述阀门(120)之间的垂直距离逐渐缩小,所述引导面(131)与所述侧壁(111)之间的垂直距离逐渐增大。From one side of the guide surface (131) close to the side wall (111) to the other side of the guide surface (131) close to the channel (121), the vertical distance between the guide surface (131) and the valve (120) gradually decreases, and the vertical distance between the guide surface (131) and the side wall (111) gradually increases.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述第二引导结构还包括至少一个连接面(133),所述至少一个连接面(133)与所述引导面(131)相接,所述至少一个连接面(133)与所述阀门(120)和/或所述壳体(110)连接。The speaker (100) according to claim 4 is characterized in that the second guide structure also includes at least one connecting surface (133), the at least one connecting surface (133) is connected to the guide surface (131), and the at least one connecting surface (133) is connected to the valve (120) and/or the shell (110).
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述第二引导结构与所述阀门(120)一体成型,或者,所述第二引导结构与所述壳体(110)一体成型。The speaker (100) according to claim 5 is characterized in that the second guide structure is integrally formed with the valve (120), or the second guide structure is integrally formed with the housing (110).
  7. 根据权利要求4至6中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述引导面(131)的数量为多个,所述壳体(110)包括多个侧壁(111),所述多个引导面(131)分别与所述多个侧壁(111)对应设置。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 4 to 6 is characterized in that the number of the guide surfaces (131) is multiple, the shell (110) includes a plurality of side walls (111), and the plurality of guide surfaces (131) are respectively arranged corresponding to the plurality of side walls (111).
  8. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述引导结构(130)包括第三引导结构,所述第三引导结构为超材料结构,所述第三引导结构包括第一结构单元、第二结构单元和第三结构单元,所述第一结构单元与所述第二结构单元之间设置有用于所述第一波束传播的第一通路,所述第二结构单元与所述第三结构单元之间设置有用于所述第一波束传播的第二通路,所述第一通路与所述第二通路不同。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 7 is characterized in that the guiding structure (130) includes a third guiding structure, the third guiding structure is a metamaterial structure, the third guiding structure includes a first structural unit, a second structural unit and a third structural unit, a first path for propagation of the first beam is arranged between the first structural unit and the second structural unit, a second path for propagation of the first beam is arranged between the second structural unit and the third structural unit, and the first path is different from the second path.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括振膜(141),所述振膜(141)面向所述通道(121)。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that the beam generating module (140) comprises a diaphragm (141), and the diaphragm (141) faces the channel (121).
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的扬声器(100)其特征在于,所述振膜(141)包括至少一个第二曲面,所述至少一个第二曲面的开口朝向所述通道(121)。The loudspeaker (100) according to claim 9 is characterized in that the diaphragm (141) comprises at least one second curved surface, and an opening of the at least one second curved surface faces the channel (121).
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括第一波束产生单元和第二波束产生单元,所述第一波束产生单元包括第一振膜,所述第二波束产生单元包括第二振膜;The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 10, characterized in that the beam generating module (140) comprises a first beam generating unit and a second beam generating unit, the first beam generating unit comprises a first diaphragm, and the second beam generating unit comprises a second diaphragm;
    所述第一波束包括第一子波束和第二子波束,所述第一振膜用于产生所述第一子波束,所述第二振膜用于产生所述第二子波束,所述第一振膜的面积与所述第二振膜的面积不同。The first beam includes a first sub-beam and a second sub-beam, the first diaphragm is used to generate the first sub-beam, the second diaphragm is used to generate the second sub-beam, and an area of the first diaphragm is different from an area of the second diaphragm.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括第三波束产生单元、第四波束产生单元和第五波束产生单元,所述第一波束包括第三子波束、第 四子波束和第五子波束,所述第三波束产生单元用于产生第三子波束,所述第四波束产生单元用于产生第四子波束,所述第五波束产生单元用于产生第五子波束;The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 11, characterized in that the beam generating module (140) comprises a third beam generating unit, a fourth beam generating unit and a fifth beam generating unit, the first beam comprises a third sub-beam, a fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam. A fourth sub-beam and a fifth sub-beam, the third beam generating unit is used to generate the third sub-beam, the fourth beam generating unit is used to generate the fourth sub-beam, and the fifth beam generating unit is used to generate the fifth sub-beam;
    所述第三波束产生单元、所述第四波束产生单元和所述第五波束产生单元处于同一平面内,所述第五波束产生单元位于所述第三波束产生单元和所述第四波束产生单元之间,所述第五波束产生单元和所述第三波束产生单元之间的间距与所述第五波束产生单元和所述第四波束产生单元之间的间距不同。The third beam generating unit, the fourth beam generating unit and the fifth beam generating unit are in the same plane, the fifth beam generating unit is located between the third beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit, and the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the third beam generating unit is different from the spacing between the fifth beam generating unit and the fourth beam generating unit.
  13. 根据权利要求1至12中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括第六波束产生单元和第七波束产生单元,所述第六波束产生单元包括第三振膜,所述第七波束产生单元包括第四振膜;The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 12, characterized in that the beam generating module (140) comprises a sixth beam generating unit and a seventh beam generating unit, the sixth beam generating unit comprises a third diaphragm, and the seventh beam generating unit comprises a fourth diaphragm;
    所述第三振膜在投影平面内的正投影和所述第四振膜在所述投影平面内的正投影至少部分重叠,所述投影平面与所述扬声器(100)的高度方向平行,或者,所述投影平面与所述扬声器(100)的高度方向垂直。The orthographic projection of the third diaphragm in the projection plane and the orthographic projection of the fourth diaphragm in the projection plane at least partially overlap, and the projection plane is parallel to the height direction of the loudspeaker (100), or the projection plane is perpendicular to the height direction of the loudspeaker (100).
  14. 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括第八波束产生单元和第九波束产生单元,所述第一波束包括第六子波束和第七子波束,所述第八波束产生单元用于产生所述第六子波束,所述第九波束产生单元用于产生所述第七子波束,所述第六子波束的发送时延和所述第七子波束的发送时延不同。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 13 is characterized in that the beam generating module (140) includes an eighth beam generating unit and a ninth beam generating unit, the first beam includes a sixth sub-beam and a seventh sub-beam, the eighth beam generating unit is used to generate the sixth sub-beam, the ninth beam generating unit is used to generate the seventh sub-beam, and the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam is different from the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述阀门(120)为非对称阀门,所述第八波束产生单元到所述通道(121)的距离与所述第九波束产生单元到所述通道(121)的距离不同。The loudspeaker (100) according to claim 14 is characterized in that the valve (120) is an asymmetric valve, and the distance from the eighth beam generating unit to the channel (121) is different from the distance from the ninth beam generating unit to the channel (121).
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述扬声器(100)还包括控制电路,所述控制电路用于确定所述第六子波束的发送时延和所述第七子波束的发送时延。The loudspeaker (100) according to claim 14 or 15 is characterized in that the loudspeaker (100) further comprises a control circuit, wherein the control circuit is used to determine the transmission delay of the sixth sub-beam and the transmission delay of the seventh sub-beam.
  17. 根据权利要求1至16中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述波束产生模组(140)包括多个波束产生的单元,所述多个波束产生的单元组成波束产生单元阵列。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 16, characterized in that the beam generating module (140) comprises a plurality of beam generating units, and the plurality of beam generating units constitute a beam generating unit array.
  18. 根据权利要求1至17中任一项所述的扬声器(100),其特征在于,所述第一波束为超声波,所述第二波束为可听声。The loudspeaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 17, characterized in that the first beam is ultrasonic wave and the second beam is audible sound.
  19. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,包括权利要求1至18中任一项所述的扬声器(100)。 An electronic device, characterized by comprising the speaker (100) according to any one of claims 1 to 18.
PCT/CN2023/117206 2022-09-30 2023-09-06 Loudspeaker and electronic device WO2024066978A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211211063.2A CN117857985A (en) 2022-09-30 2022-09-30 Speaker and electronic device
CN202211211063.2 2022-09-30

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024066978A1 true WO2024066978A1 (en) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90475993

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/117206 WO2024066978A1 (en) 2022-09-30 2023-09-06 Loudspeaker and electronic device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117857985A (en)
WO (1) WO2024066978A1 (en)

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008050123A1 (en) * 2006-10-25 2008-05-02 Gary Paul Nicholson Loudspeakers
CN101588524A (en) * 2009-07-08 2009-11-25 电子科技大学 Directionally adjustable miniature audio frequency directional loudspeaker
CN104219608A (en) * 2014-09-15 2014-12-17 精拓丽音科技(北京)有限公司 Modulation type piezoelectric loudspeaker, loudspeaker system and control method thereof
CN209572154U (en) * 2019-04-10 2019-11-01 南京咩咩达智能科技有限公司 Small-sized plane vibrating membrane loudspeaker and earphone
CN111885466A (en) * 2020-07-31 2020-11-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Loudspeaker structure and electronic equipment
CN112272250A (en) * 2020-10-28 2021-01-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 Loudspeaker module and electronic equipment
CN112313967A (en) * 2018-04-04 2021-02-02 Pss比利时股份有限公司 Speaker unit
CN114866887A (en) * 2022-03-31 2022-08-05 歌尔股份有限公司 Speaker module and intelligent wearing equipment

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2008050123A1 (en) * 2006-10-25 2008-05-02 Gary Paul Nicholson Loudspeakers
CN101588524A (en) * 2009-07-08 2009-11-25 电子科技大学 Directionally adjustable miniature audio frequency directional loudspeaker
CN104219608A (en) * 2014-09-15 2014-12-17 精拓丽音科技(北京)有限公司 Modulation type piezoelectric loudspeaker, loudspeaker system and control method thereof
CN112313967A (en) * 2018-04-04 2021-02-02 Pss比利时股份有限公司 Speaker unit
CN209572154U (en) * 2019-04-10 2019-11-01 南京咩咩达智能科技有限公司 Small-sized plane vibrating membrane loudspeaker and earphone
CN111885466A (en) * 2020-07-31 2020-11-03 维沃移动通信有限公司 Loudspeaker structure and electronic equipment
CN112272250A (en) * 2020-10-28 2021-01-26 维沃移动通信有限公司 Loudspeaker module and electronic equipment
CN114866887A (en) * 2022-03-31 2022-08-05 歌尔股份有限公司 Speaker module and intelligent wearing equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117857985A (en) 2024-04-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020186971A1 (en) Vibration sounding device and electronic apparatus
US6087760A (en) Ultrasonic transmitter-receiver
JP2673002B2 (en) Speaker system
US7275621B1 (en) Skew horn for a loudspeaker
US6343133B1 (en) Axially propagating mid and high frequency loudspeaker systems
US8472652B2 (en) Audio reproduction system comprising narrow and wide directivity loudspeakers
US20040251079A1 (en) Closed loop embedded audio transmission line technology for loudspeaker enclosures and systems
EP1460880A2 (en) Loudspeaker array
KR102272583B1 (en) Sound producing device
US9906870B2 (en) Apparatuses and methods for sound recording, manipulation, distribution and pressure wave creation through energy transfer between photons and media particles
EP2822295A1 (en) Sound generating apparatus and electronic apparatus including the same
US7590257B1 (en) Axially propagating horn array for a loudspeaker
EP1927978B1 (en) Acoustic waveguide and electroacoustic system comprising said waveguide
JP2022548287A (en) speaker and terminal
CN114979876A (en) Earphone device
WO2024066978A1 (en) Loudspeaker and electronic device
CN110784799A (en) Sound directional transmission method and system
CN111669688B (en) Sound producing device
US10986447B2 (en) Doppler compensation in coaxial and offset speakers
JP7318095B1 (en) speaker device and electronic equipment
JP3356847B2 (en) Sound source configuration method
US11558691B2 (en) Loudspeaker array cabinet
US20230319459A1 (en) Loudspeaker apparatus, loudspeaker system, display panel and systems thereof
JP2006060330A (en) Stereo reproducing apparatus
EP1445979A2 (en) Speaker system with a main and a subordinate speaker

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23870217

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1